Agilent L4400 Series
LXI Class C Instruments
User’s Guide
Agilent Technologies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Safety Notices
The following general safety precautions
must be observed during all phases of oper-
ation of this instrument. Failure to comply
with these precautions or with specific
warnings or instructions elsewhere in this
manual violates safety standards of design,
manufacture, and intended use of the
instrument. Agilent Technologies assumes
no liability of the customer’s failure to com-
ply with the requirements.
Do Not Modify the Instrument
Do not install substitute parts or perform
any unauthorized modification to the prod-
uct. Return the product to an Agilent Sales
and Service Office for service and repair to
ensure that safety features are maintained.
In Case of Damage
Instruments that appear damaged or defec-
tive should be made inoperative and
secured against unintended operation until
they can be repaired by qualified service
personnel.
General
Do not use this products in any manner not
specified by the manufacturer. The protec-
tive features of this product may be
impaired if it is used in a manner not speci-
fied in the operation instructions.
Safety Symbols
Alternating current
Before Applying Power
Verify that all safety precautions are taken.
Make all connections to the unit before
applying power.
Frame or chassis
terminal
Ground the Instrument
Standby supply. Unit is
not completely
disconnected from ac
mains when switch is off
This product is provided with protective
earth terminals. To minimize shock hazard,
the instrument must be connected to the
ac power mains through a grounded power
cable, with the ground wire firmly con-
nected to an electrical ground (safety
ground) at the power outlet. Any interrup-
tion of the protective (grounding) conduc-
tor or disconnection of the protective earth
terminal will cause a potential shock haz-
ard that could result in personal injury.
Caution, risk of electric
shock
Caution, refer to
accompanying description
Do Not Operate in an Explosive
Atmosphere
If you have questions about your shipment, or if you need information
about warranty, service, or technical support, contact Agilent
Technologies:
Do not operate the instrument in the pres-
ence of flammable gases or fumes.
In the United States: (800) 829-4444
In Europe: 31 20 547 2111
Do Not Remove the Instrument
Cover
Only qualified, service-trained personal
who are aware of the hazards involved
should remove instrument covers. Always
disconnect the power cable and any exter-
nal circuits before removing the instrument
cover.
In Japan: 0120-421-345
Or go to ww.agilent.com/find/assist for information on contacting
Agilent in your country of specific location. You can also contact your
Agilent Technologies Representative.
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
According to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and CEN/CENELEC EN 45014
Manufacturer’s Name:
Manufacturer’s Address:
Agilent Technologies, Incorporated
815 – 14th St. SW
Loveland, CO 80537
USA
Declares under sole responsibility that the products as originally delivered:
Model Number
L4421A
L4433A
L4437A
L4445A
Product Name
LXI 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer
LXI Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
LXI 32-Channel General Purpose Switch
LXI Microwave Switch / Attenuator Driver
LXI 64 Bit Digital I/O
L4450A
L4451A
L4452A
LXI 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter
LXI Multifunction Module
Product Options:
This declaration covers all options of the above product(s)
comply with the essential requirements of the following applicable European Directives, and carry
the CE marking accordingly:
Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC)
EMC Directive (89/336/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC)
and conform with the following product standards:
EMC
Standard
Limit
IEC 61326-1:1997+A1:1998 / EN 61326-1:1997+A1:1998
CISPR 11:1990 / EN 55011:1991
Group 1 Class A
IEC 61000-4-2:1995+A1:1998 / EN 61000-4-2:1995
IEC 61000-4-3:1995 / EN 61000-4-3:1995
IEC 61000-4-4:1995 / EN 61000-4-4:1995
IEC 61000-4-5:1995 / EN 61000-4-5:1995
IEC 61000-4-6:1996 / EN 61000-4-6:1996
IEC 61000-4-11:1994 / EN 61000-4-11:1994
4 kV CD, 4 kV AD
3 V/m, 80-1000 MHz
0.5 kV signal lines, 1 kV power lines
0.5 kV line-line, 1 kV line-ground
3 V, 0.15-80 MHz 1 cycle, 100%
Interrupt: 10 ms, 20 ms
Canada: ICES-001:1998
Australia/New Zealand: AS/NZS 2064.1
IEC 61010-1:2001 / EN 61010-1:2001
Canada: CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1:2004
USA: UL 61010-1: 2004
Safety
Supplementary Information:
This DoC applies to above-listed products placed on the EU market after:
1 May 2006
Date
Ray Corson
Product Regulations Program Manager
For further information, please contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office, agent or distributor,
or Agilent Technologies Deutschland GmbH, Herrenberger Straße 130, D 71034 Böblingen, Germany.
Template: A5971-5302-2, Rev. B.00
L4421A-DoC-A
DoC Revision A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
2
2
3
4
5
5
5
6
L4400 User’s Guide
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122
126
L4400 User’s Guide
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handshaking 209
Counter 222
Clock 224
224
233
245
L4400 User’s Guide
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibration Message 252
x
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Agilent L4400 LXI Class C Instruments
User’s Guide
1
Introduction to the L4400 Series
LXI Instruments
Welcome. The products covered in this user’s guide represent the Agilent
L4400 Series of LXI Class C instruments. LXI, an acronym for LAN
eXtensions for Instrumentation, is an instrumentation standard for devices
that use the Ethernet (LAN) as their primary communications interface.
The L4400 series family of instruments provide switching and multifunction
test capabilites for design verification, automated test, and data acquisition
applications. The instruments include:
• L4421A 40- Channel Armature Multiplexer Module
• L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix Module
• L4437A 32- Channel General Purpose Switch Module
• L4445A Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver Module
• L4450A 64- Bit Digital I/O Module with Memory and Counter
• L4451A 4- Channel Isolated D/A Converter w/ Waveform Memory Module
• L4452A Multifunction Module
This chapter contains general information on instrument environmental and
electrical operating conditions, instrument interconnections, and rack
mounting instructions. The chapter also contains information on applying
power.
1
Agilent Technologies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Introduction to the L4400 Series LXI Instruments
Instrument Considerations
This section lists important items and actions that can affect the operation of
your modules.
Environmental Operating Conditions
The L4400 Series LXI modules are designed to operate in a temperature
range of 0 °C to +55 °C with non-condensing humidity. The maximum
humidity is 80% at 40 °C or higher. Do not use in locations where conductive
dust or electrolytic salt dust may be present.
The modules should be operated in an indoor environment where
temperature and humidity are controlled. Condensation can pose a potential
shock hazard. Condensation can occur when the modules are moved from a
cold to a warm environment, or if the temperature and/or humidity of the
environment changes quickly.
The following table shows maximum voltage ratings for each module.
If conditions change, ensure that condensation has evaporated and the
instrument has thermally stabilized until pollution degree 1 conditions are
restored before turning on power to the equipment.
Table 1-1. L4400 Series LXI Instrument Voltage Ratings.
Pollution Degree 1 Specifications
Pollution Degree 2 Specifications
Instrument
L4421A
40 channels, 300V rms or DC, 1A,
60 VA/channel
40 channels, 100V rms or DC, 1A,
60 VA/channel
Dual/quad 4x8 matrix, 100 Vpeak,
0.5 A, 10 VA per channel
L4433A
L4437A
Dual/quad 4x8 matrix, 150 Vpeak,
0.5A, 10 VA/channel
28 channels, 300 V rms or DC, 1A,
60 VA per channel
28 channels, 100 V rms or DC, 1A,
60 VA per channel
4 channels, 250 V rms or 30 VDC,
5A, 150 VA per channel
4 channels, 100 V rms or 30 VDC,
5A, 150 VA per channel
L4445A
L4450A
L4451A
L4452A
See Chapter 7 - L4445A
64 channels, 5V, 30 mA Max
4 channels 16V, 20 mA
See Chapter 7 - L4445A
64 channels, 5v, 30 mA Max
4 channels, 16V, 20 mA
32 DIO channels, 42V, 400 mA,
2 channel DAC, 12V, 10 mA
32 DIO channels, 42V, 400 mA,
2 channel DAC, 12V, 10 mA
2
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction to the L4400 Series LXI Instruments
1
Pollution Degree 1: No pollution or only dry, non-conductive pollution
occurs. The pollution has no influence (on insulation) (IEC 61010-1
2nd Edition).
NOTE
NOTE
Pollution Degree 2: Normally only non-conductive pollution occurs.
Occasionally, a temporary conductivity (leakage current between
isolated conductors) caused by condensation can be expected (IEC
61010-1 2nd Edition).
Electrical Operating Conditions
To avoid electric shock, turn off the L4400 instrument and
WARNING
disconnect or de-energize all field wiring to the instrument and to
the analog bus connector (if present) before removing any
terminal block covers.
Transients
The L4421A, L4433A, and L4437A modules are designed to safely withstand
occasional transient overvoltages up to 1000 Vpeak. Typically, these
transient overvoltages result from switching inductive loads or from nearby
lightning strikes. The lightning-caused transient overvoltages that may
occasionally occur on mains power outlets may be as high as 2500 Vpeak.
The L4445A, L4450A, L4451A, and L4452A modules are intended for only
low- voltage applications, and should not be connected to circuits that may
generate or conduct large transient voltages.
High Energy Sources
These instruments are designed to handle inputs up to their rated currents
or their rated powers, whichever is less. Under certain fault conditions, high
energy sources could provide substantially more current or power than a
module can handle. It is important to provide external current limiting, such
as fuses, if the instrument inputs are connected to high- energy sources.
Install current limiting devices between high energy sources and
the module inputs.
CAUTION
L4400 User’s Guide
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Introduction to the L4400 Series LXI Instruments
Interconnection Solutions Overview
Depending on your specific requirements, you can connect your DUT
to the L4400 LXI instrument using the following optional interconnection
solutions. See the L4400 series Product Data Sheets for additional
information. The data sheets can be located on the Web at:
www.agilent.com/find/L4400
TerminalBlocks Detachable terminal blocks are available for most of the L4400
series instruments and offer a flexible method for connecting external wiring
(300V rated). Each terminal block is customized for a specific module.
Ordering Information: 349xxT(e.g., 34921T, 34937T, etc.)
Shielded Cables Standard cables are available for 50- pin D-sub and
78- pin D- sub connectors. Depending on the module and your specific
requirements, one or two cables may be required per module.
Ordering Information:
Y1135A (1.5 meters, 50- pin D-sub, 300V)
Y1136A (3 meters, 50-pin D- sub, 300V)
Y1137A (1.5 meters, 78- pin D- sub, 300V)
Y1138A (3 meters, 78-pin D- sub, 300V)
Solder Cup Connector Kits These connector kits are available if you want to
build your own custom cables.
Ordering Information:
Y1139A (50- pin D- sub female, 125V, for L4421A/L4433A/L4437A)
Y1141A (50- pin D- sub male, 125V, for L4451A/L4452A)
Y1142A (78- pin D- sub male, 60V, for L4450A)
L4445A Remote (Extender) Modules and Distribution Boards These kits expand the
number of switches and attenuators controlled by the L4445A Microwave
Switch/Attenuator Driver instrument.
Ordering Information:
34945EXT (External Driver)
Distribution Boards:
Y1150A (Eight N181x SPDT switches)
Y1151A (Two 87104x/106x multiport or 87406B matrix switches)
Y1152A (One 87204x/206x or 87606B switch and two N181x switches)
Y1153A (Two 84904/5/6/7/8 or 8494/5/6 step attenuators)
Y1154A (Two 87222 transfer switches and six N181x SPDT switches)
Y1155A (Generic screw terminals for driving 16 switch coils
4
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction to the L4400 Series LXI Instruments
1
Bench-Top Operation and Instrument Rack Mounting
The L4400 series instruments can be located on a bench- top or rack mounted
in standard 19-inch EIA rack cabinets.
Bench-Top Operation
Cooling and ventilation of the L4400 series instruments are through the sides
of the instrument chassis. When placed on the bench- top, ensure the sides of
the instrument are not directly covered or blocked.
Rack Mounting
The L4400 instruments are mounted in EIA rack cabinets using the Y1160A
rack mount kit. The kit allows you to mount one or two L4400 instruments
side-by- side on a sliding shelf, while occupying one EIA rack unit of space.
Rackmounting instructions are provided with the kit and are also provided
here.
Rack Mounting Kit Contents
The contents of the Y1160A sliding shelf rack mount kit are listed in Table
1- 2.
Table 1-2. L4400 (Y1160A) Rack Mount Kit Contents.
Part Number
1515-1367
0570-1577
2680-0105
2510-0283
0590-0804
2740-0003
5180-0102
5180-0103
5180-0104
5180-0105
Y1160-90030
Quantity
Item
1
Description
M4x8 flat head screw
10-32 pan head dress screw
10-32 x 0.625 pan head screw
10-32 x 0.5 flat head screw
10-32 clip-on nut
12
4
2
3
10
2
4
5
12
4
6
10-32 nut w/lock washer
Sliding shelf
7
1
8
Shelf rails
2
9
Filler panels
2
10
---
Rear (rail) brackets
Installation Instructions
2
1
L4400 User’s Guide
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Introduction to the L4400 Series LXI Instruments
Procedure
Figure 1- 1 is a composite drawing of the Y1160A sliding shelf rack mount kit.
The drawing shows the location/usage of the hardware items listed in Table
1- 2.
10
3
6
7
8
9
1
5
4
2
Figure 1-1. Y1160A Instrument Rack Mount Kit (L4400 Series).
6
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction to the L4400 Series LXI Instruments
1
The L4400 instrument(s) can be mounted between any two adjacent EIA unit
indicators (Figure 1- 2). On Agilent racks, an EIA unit indicator is
represented by a triangle ( !) on the rack’s front and rear- facing columns. A
single EIA unit extends from the triangle indicator to the next indicator on
the column (1 Unit = 44.45 mm = 1.75 in).
6.35 mm
EIA unit indicators
15.875 mm
(1 EIA unit)
15.875 mm
44.45 mm
(1.75 in)
6.35 mm
Figure 1-2. EIA Unit Indicators for Installing the Y1160A Rack Mount Kit.
It is not necessary to remove the cabinet side panels to rack mount the
L4400 instruments. The side panels can be removed, however, if additional
access to the cabinet’s vertical columns is desired.
NOTE
Install the Shelf Rails
1. Select the vertical position in the rack between any two adjacent EIA unit
indicators where the L4400 instrument is to be installed. Insert clip- on nuts
(item 5) on the three holes between the unit indicators. Place nuts on both
the left and right front- facing columns (Figure 1-3).
L4400 User’s Guide
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Introduction to the L4400 Series LXI Instruments
If center- facing columns with holes are present on the frame, insert a clip- on
nut on the hole perpendicular to the center hole on the front facing column.
See Figure 1-3.
back of rack
center-facing colums
insert clip nuts
on first and third
holes between indicators
(center of rack)
rail “channel
insert clip nut
if column present
insert clip nuts
between rack unit
indicators
front-facing colums
Figure 1-3. Rack Column and Shelf Rail Orientation.
2. With the rail “channel” facing the center of the rack, connect the rail to the
front facing column using a 10- 32 flathead screw (item 4) and the center
clip- on nut on the front- facing column. Repeat for the rail on the opposite
column. Ensure the rail channel faces the center of the rack.
If the rack has center- facing columns (Figure 1- 3), insert a 10-32 pan head
screw through the rail opening and clip nut (perpendicular to the
front- facing column). Repeat for the rail on the opposite column.
3. On the rack’s rear- facing columns, insert clip- on nuts on the first and third
holes between the EIA unit indicators that are at the same vertical position
as the indicators on the front- facing columns.
4. Attach the rear brackets to the rail ends using two 10- 32 pan head screws
(item 3) and two 10- 32 nuts with lockwashers (item 6) per rail. Adjust the
bracket along the rail until the bracket end aligns with (covers) the rack’s
rear- facing columns. Tighten the 10- 32 pan head screws to firmly connect the
bracket to the rail and maintain the rail length.
Connect the rail brackets to the rear- facing columns using two 10-32 pan
head screws per column.
8
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction to the L4400 Series LXI Instruments
1
Install the Sliding Shelf
Facing the rack, slide the shelf (item 7) onto the bottom surfaces of the rail
channels. The tabs at the back of the shelf pass underneath the channel
surface. The tabs allow you to extend the shelf from the cabinet, thus
providing a working surface for mounting the instruments.
Rail channel
Shelf tab
Bottom surface
Figure 1-4. Installing the Shelf.
Install Instruments on the Shelf
The L4400 instruments can be installed flush (even) with front edge of the
shelf, recessed in 50 mm increments, or reverse-mounted with the front of
the instrument facing the back of the rack cabinet.
1. Extend the shelf from the rack such that approximately 50% - 75% of the
shelf surface is outside of the rack. (The tabs on the back of the shelf that run
underneath the rail channel prevent the shelf from tipping.)
2. Determine the position of the instruments (flush, recessed, reversed). To
accommodate the terminal blocks (available with some of the L4400
instruments) and to simplify cable routing, it is recommended that the
instruments be mounted flush (even) with the front or back edge of the shelf.
3. Note the location of the four mounting holes on the bottom of the
instrument (Figure 1- 1). Set the carrier on the shelf, and align the mounting
holes with the holes on the shelf. Insert four M4x8 flat head screws (item 1)
upward through the bottom of the shelf and into the carrier mounting holes.
L4400 User’s Guide
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Introduction to the L4400 Series LXI Instruments
4. Install the second L4400 instrument (if present) in the shelf area adjacent
to the first instrument. If only one instrument is installed, install a filler
panel on the front edge of the unused area. Insert two M4x8 flat head screws
(item 1) upward through the bottom of the shelf and into the panel.
5. Connect the instrument power cord, LAN cable, and GPIB cable if present.
6. For instruments that have accompanying terminal blocks, partially remove
the instrument sub-assembly from the instrument (carrier) by loosening the
spring-loaded mounting screws (Figure 1-5). Remove the support sleeve from
the terminal block. Locate and remove the flat head screws from the sleeve
and remove the pan head screw from between the instrument’s D- sub
connectors (Figure 1-5). Connect the sleeve to the instrument using the flat
head and pan head screws as shown. Reconnect the sub- assembly.
spring-loaded
mounting screws
pan head screw
instrument sub-assembly
flat head screws
terminal block
support sleeve
pan head screw
flat head screws
Figure 1-5. Connecting the Terminal Block Support Sleeve.
Refer to Chapters 4-10 for information on Terminal Block wiring and
connecting the terminal block to the instrument.
NOTE
10
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction to the L4400 Series LXI Instruments
1
Connect the Shelf to the Rack Frame
Once the instruments are installed and all power cords and cables are routed
as intended, slide the shelf into the cabinet until the shelf handles meet the
front-facing columns of the rack frame. Using two10-32 pan head dress
screws (item 2) per column, secure the shelf to the frame.
Applying Power
The input power, operating environment, and storage environment
specifications for the L4400 series instruments are listed in Table 1-3. Refer
to the instrument data sheets for a complete listing of instrument
specifications. The data sheets can be found on the Web at:
www.agilent.com/find/L4400
Table 1-3. Agilent L4400 Series Instrument Input Power Specifications.
Instrument
Description
Power Supply:
Universal 100V to 240V 10%
L4421A
L4433A
L4437A
L4445A
L4450A
L4451A
L4452A
Power Line Frequency:
50Hz to 60Hz 10% auto sensing
50VA
Power Consumption:
Operating Environment:
Full accuracy for 0°C to 55°C
Full accuracy to 80% R.H. at 40°C
Storage Environment:
-40°C to 70°C
Connecting the Power Cord and Turning On the Instrument
Connect the power cord supplied with the instrument or a power cord rated
for the conditions listed in Table 1-3 to the electrical outlet and to the
instrument.
Turn the instrument on (and off) by pressing the power button shown in
Figure 1-6.
L4400 User’s Guide
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Introduction to the L4400 Series LXI Instruments
Refer to Table 3- 1 (Chapter 3) for definitions of the LEDs (ATTN, LAN, PWR)
on the L4400 instrument front panel.
Power Button
Figure 1-6. Location of the L4400 Series Instrument Power Button.
12
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Agilent L4400 LXI Class C Instruments
User’s Guide
2
Software Installation and Configuration
GPIB Configuration 33
This chapter contains the software installation and configuration procedures
required for you to use the L4400 series instruments. Also included are
procedures for configuring the LAN and (optional) GPIB interfaces, and for
testing the communication (IO) paths to the instruments.
13
Agilent Technologies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
Installing the Agilent IO Libraries and L4400 Instrument Drivers
Communication and control of the L4400 series instruments from a Microsoft®
programming environment is provided through the following software that is
included with the L4400A instruments:
• Agilent E2094A IO Libraries Suite 14.1
• Agilent L4400A Product Reference CD- ROM (p/n 34989-13601)
This section covers the sequence and procedures for installing the IO libraries
and instrument drivers required to program the instruments.
Installing the Agilent IO Libraries
The Agilent IO Libraries Suite must be installed first, followed by the L4400
instrument drivers that are located on the Product Reference CD- ROM (p/n
34989- 13601). The IO Libraries are contained on the Agilent Automa-
tion- Ready CD included with the instrument, or may be downloaded from the
Agilent Developer Network website at http://adn.tm.agilent.com, under ‘Soft-
ware Downloads: IO Libraries Suite’.
Before installing the IO libraries, review table 2- 1 to verify that your computer
meets the specifications required by the software.
Table 2-1. Agilent IO Libraries Suite System Requirements.
Processor
450 MHz Intel Pentium® II or higher
Operating System
Windows XP Professional or Home Edition (Service Pack 1 or
later
Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4 or later)
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or greater (recommended)
128 MB (256 MB or greater recommended)
Web Browser
Available Memory
Available Disk Space
225 MB required for installation:
- 160 MB for Microsoft .NET Framework
- 65 MB for Agilent IO Libraries Suite
175 MB required for operation:
- 110 MB for Microsoft .NET Framework
- 65 MB for Agilent IO Libraries Suite
Video
Super VGA (800x600) with 256 colors
14
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
Close all applications on your computer. Insert the Agilent Automation-Ready CD into
the CD-ROM drive. Follow the instructions as prompted during the installation. Accept
all default directories specified.
If the IO libraries installation does not start automatically, select Start > Run from the
Windows Start menu and type <drive>:\autorun\auto.exe where <drive> is the designa-
tor of the CD-ROM drive.
If another vendor’s implementation of VISA (Virtual Instrument Software
NOTE
Architecture) is currently installed on your computer, continue installation
of the Agilent IO Libraries by installing Agilent VISA in side-by-side mode.
More information on side-by-side operation can be found in the Agilent IO
Libraries Suite Help (available after installation is complete) under “Using
Agilent VISA with Another Vendor’s VISA.
Installing the Agilent IO Libraries also installs the Interchangeable Virtual
NOTE
Instrument (IVI) Shared Components. The IVI Shared Components are
required before IVI drivers (e.g. IVI-COM, IVI-C) can be installed (see
“Installing the L4400 Instrument Drivers”).
After the IO libraries have been successfully installed, you will see the Agilent IO Con-
trol (IO icon) in the taskbar notification area of your computer screen (Figure 2-1).
Figure 2-1. Agilent IO Control Icon.
Installing the L4400 Instrument Drivers
Insert the L4400 Product Reference CD-ROM into the computer. The installation pro-
gram will open the menu window shown in Figure 2-2. If the program does not start
automatically, select Start -> Run -> Open: <cd-rom drive>:\index.html.
L4400 User’s Guide
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
Figure 2-2. L4400 Product Reference CD-ROM Software (Driver) Menu
Install the appropriate driver from the menu based on the environment you will use to
program the L4400 instruments. Table 2-2 contains a list of common environments and
corresponding drivers. Accept all default directories specified during installation.
Table 2-2. L4400 Programming Environments and Recommended Drivers
Recommended Drivers
Programming Environment
Microsoft® Visual C 6.0 Visual C++, ANSI C
IVI-C, IVI COM, VISA
IVI-COM, VISA, VISA-COM
IVI-COM
Microsoft® Visual Basic 6.0
Microsoft Visual Studio .NET for C#, C,
Visual Basic
Agilent VEE
IVI-COM
National Instruments LabVIEW
LabVIEW Plug&Play (with
L44XX native mode driver),
IVI-C
National Instruments LabWindows/CVI
IVI-C
For information on firmware updates that may be available after purchase,
refer to “Firmware Updates” at the end of this chapter.
16
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
Configuring the L4400 Instruments
Instrument configuration as applied to the L4400 series of LXI instruments
involves the following:
• identifying the IP address and host name (LAN programming)
• (optional) setting the GPIB address
• testing the communication paths (LAN and/or GPIB) to the instrument
• opening the Web interface to the instrument
Each task listed above is accomplished using the Agilent Connection Expert
Feature of the Agilent IO Libraries Suite.
The information included this section of the chapter is:
• Selecting a LAN Network
• Connecting the LAN Cables
• Configuring the LAN Interface
• GPIB Configuration
Selecting a LAN Network
This user’s guide defines a private (isolated) LAN as a network in which
instrument access is limited to a direct connection between the computer and
the instrument, or to multiple instruments connected via a dedicated router or
switch. A site (company-wide) LAN is defined as a network in which
instrument access is available to many users in on- site and remote locations.
The instrument’s application and/or your company’s Information Technology
(IT) department may have guidelines that help decide the type (private or site)
of network used. If a network configuration has not been determined, refer to
the following considerations concerning each type.
Private LAN Considerations
Some of the basic parameters of a private LAN network to consider are:
security, performance, reliability, and IP address availability.
L4400 User’s Guide
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
Security: a private network generally involves direct connections between the
computer and the instruments, and may include switches and routers. Access
to the instrument is limited to users connected directly to the private network,
as opposed to users on a site network that could locate and access the
instrument from any location - possibly disrupting tests in progress. Code
generation for test systems on a private network is often simplified as
protection against unauthorized users may not be required.
Performance: test systems where large amounts of data are transferred
usually have faster throughput on a private network. On a site network, heavy
and unpredictable LAN traffic (lots of data) affects each instrument (node) on
the network. The impact on a test system is that repeatability is difficult to
achieve as latencies are difficult to account for.
Reliability: private networks are fundamentally more reliable than site
networks as they host fewer users and are less complex than site networks.
Private networks are isolated from conditions that could bring down (crash) a
site network.
IP Address Availability: Every instrument (node) on a LAN (private or site)
has an IP (Internet Protocol) address. Due to the expanding use of the internet,
the number of site network IP addresses available is limited. By using a router
with Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) capability on a private
network, the router can assign an IP address to each instrument thus creating
a sub- network (subnet) that does not consume site IP addresses.
Site LAN Considerations
For applications requiring access by many users or by users at distributed
sites, a site LAN network is required. In addition to supporting multiple users,
site LANs often offer the advantage of being maintained by IT departments.
When using a site LAN, consult your IT department regarding all LAN
configuration and security issues.
Connecting the LAN Cables
LAN cables are connected to the LAN terminal on the instrument, the
computer, and to the router or switch if they are part of your network.
18
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
Private Network Connections
Figure 2- 3 shows typical LAN cable connections for a private network.
Typical Private (isolated) LAN Networks
Direct
Connection
CAT5 Crossover Cable
L4400
PC
Ethernet Hub / Switch / Router
Router / Switch
Connection
PC
L4400
L4400
L4400
L4400
Figure 2-3. Typical Private LAN Network Connections.
When making a direct connection between the L4400 instrument and the PC,
use the yellow LAN crossover cable provided with the instrument. Note, if
your computer supports Auto- MDIX or contains a LAN card with gigabit data
transfer rates, the (yellow) crossover cable is not required. A standard LAN
cable can be used instead. For private LAN networks that include a switch or
router, use standard LAN cables for network connections. Do not use the
crossover cable.
Once the LAN cables are connected, you can turn on the L4400 instrument(s).
L4400 User’s Guide
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
Site Network Connections
Figure 2- 4 shows typical LAN cable connections for a site network.
Typical Site LAN Networks
To Site LAN
L4400
standard LAN cable
PC
Ethernet Hub / Switch / Router
Router / Switch
Connection
To Site LAN
PC
L4400
L4400
L4400
L4400
Figure 2-4. Typical Site LAN Network Connections.
On site networks, the L4400 instruments and the computer are connected
directly to site LAN ports, or are connected to the site LAN through a switch.
In each site network configuration, standard LAN cables are used.
Once all LAN cables are connected, turn on the L4400A instrument.
IP Addresses and Host Names
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and Automatic IP are enabled
on each L4400 series instrument shipped from Agilent. This allows the
instrument to automatically obtain an address on the network. If there is a
DHCP server on the network, the server will assign the address to the
instrument.
If there is not a DHCP server on the network, the L4400 instrument will
automatically determine an address to use. The address will be in the range of
169.254.xxx.xxx. If available, the instrument will try to acquire its default
setting of 169.254.44.88.
20
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
Host Names Each L4400 instrument has a default host name. The format of
the host name is:
A- L44xxA- yyyyy
where ‘L44xxA’ is replaced by the module number (e.g. L4421A) and ‘yyyyy’
are the last five digits of the instrument serial number.
The instrument host name is reported by Agilent Connection Expert for
network servers that support Dynamic Domain Name Service (DNS). For
network servers that do not support Dynamic DNS, only the IP address is
reported.
Instrument Addressing
During programming, an L4400 series instrument is accessed through its
address string which consists of an IP address or host name. For example:
TCPIP0::192:168:1.221::inst0::INSTR
The L4400 series instruments can also be accessed using a host name as part
of the address string. For example:
TCPIP0::A-L4450A-12345.agilent.com::inst0::INSTR
The L4400 instruments can be restored to their default configurations by
NOTE
pressing the ‘Reset’ pin on the instrument’s front or rear panels.
Computer Configuration
Most computers used for instrument/system control are configured for LAN
and Internet access. Before starting Agilent Connection Expert to locate and
configure the instruments, verify that your computer is able to connect to the
network that will include the instruments.
A Web browser is used to open web interfaces to the L4400 instruments (See
“Using the Instrument Web Interface”). In some network configurations, a
proxy server cannot be used to access the instrument IP addresses. In these
situations, the browser must be set to disable the proxy for the instrument’s
address.
Configuring the LAN Interface
With the L4400 instrument(s) turned on and connected to a private or site
LAN network, start Agilent Connection Expert utility by clicking on the
Agilent IO Control icon and selecting “Agilent Connection Expert from the
pop- up menu (Figure 2- 5).
L4400 User’s Guide
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
The procedure for using Agilent Connection Expert to locate and configure
L4400 instruments is independent of the type of network you are using
(private or site) and the network devices present (switches or routers).
NOTE
For more information on Interactive IO, refer to the Agilent IO Libraries
Suite Getting Started Guide. The guide is available on-line by clicking on
the Agilent IO Control icon and then selecting Documentation !IO
Libraries Suite Getting Started.
Clicking the icon opens the
pop-up menu
Figure 2-5. Starting Agilent Connection Expert.
Locating the Instruments
Agilent Connection Expert opens with a “welcome screen” and window similar
to that shown in Figure 2-6. The computer interfaces configured during
installation of the Agilent IO Libraries are displayed in the left column
(Explorer pane) and the properties of the configured interface and instrument
are displayed in the right column (Properties pane).
22
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
Explorer pane
Properties pane
Figure 2-6. Agilent Connection Expert (ACE) Opening Window.
To search the network for instruments, click on “Add Instrument” located on
the Connection Expert tool bar. From the “Add Instrument” window, select the
LAN (TCPIP0) interface and click on ‘OK’. See Figure 2- 7.
Figure 2-7. Agilent Connection Expert “Add Instrument Window”.
L4400 User’s Guide
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
Clicking on “Find Instruments” (Figure 2-8) opens the search window. Clicking
on “Find Now” performs the search for instruments on the LAN network.
Instruments found (discovered) on the network (local subnet) are indicated as
shown. In the Figure 2- 8 example, two instruments were located on the router
subnet.
Figure 2-8. L4400 Instrument Private LAN Connection.
The “Find Instrument” function of Agilent Connection Expert is supported
NOTE
only on computers that have a single LAN card installed. If your computer
has more than one LAN card, the L4400 instruments must be entered
“manually” using the IP addresses.
Adding and Configuring the Instruments
To add an instrument to the network configuration, select (highlight) the
instrument host name/IP address and click on ‘OK’ in the “Search for Instru-
ments on the LAN” window. This opens the “LAN Instrument” window shown
in Figure 2- 9.
24
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
Note serial number to identify
multiple instruments
Click either to
test connection
Figure 2-9. Verifying a Communication Path to the Instrument.
The LAN Instrument window identifies the instrument’s host name, its IP
address, its VISA address, and product number. Because the network server
used in this example does not support Dynamic DNS, the host name is not reg-
istered for use by the server. Thus, the instrument is accessed by its IP
address.
Click on “Test Connection” or “Identify Instrument” to test the communication
path to the instrument. Click on”OK” to add the configured instrument to your
network.
Repeat the sequence of Figures 2- 7 through 2- 9 for each instrument. As instru-
ments are added, they appear in the Agilent Connection Expert Explorer pane
as shown in Figure 2- 10. Selecting the instrument in the Explorer pane dis-
plays its properties in the Properties pane.
L4400 User’s Guide
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
Figure 2-10. Configured Instruments added to LAN Network.
Interactive IO
The Interactive IO feature of Agilent Connection Expert allows you to interact
with the instruments by sending commands and seeing the instruments’
responses. Interactive IO can help you:
• troubleshoot communication problems
• learn the instrument's command set
• prototype commands and check the instrument's responses before writing
code
With Interactive IO, you can choose from a menu of common commands
(*IDN?, *RST, *TST?), or execute commands from the instrument’s command
set (see Chapters 4-10 for the commands available with each instrument).
Figure 2- 11 shows how Interactive IO is started from Agilent Connection
Expert.
For more information on Interactive IO, refer to the Agilent IO Libraries
NOTE
Suite Getting Started Guide. The guide is available on-line by clicking on
the Agilent IO Control icon and then selecting Documentation !IO
Libraries Suite Getting Started.
26
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
Select Interactive IO
Select (highlight) instrument
Figure 2-11. Selecting an Instrument and Starting Interactive IO.
Identifying the Instruments
L4400 series instruments are comprised of the carrier, the instrument
sub- assembly, and on selected instruments, a wiring terminal block. The
carrier and instrument sub- assembly have separate serial numbers and
separate firmware revisions. The commands used to query these parameters
are:
• *IDN? (returns the carrier serial number and firmware revision)
• SYSTem:CTYPe? 1 (returns the instrument sub- assembly serial
number and firmware revision)
• SYSTem:CDEScription? 1 (returns the instrument description.)
These commands can be executed from the Interactive IO window. Examples
of the information returned by each command are as follows:
L4400 User’s Guide
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
*IDN?
Agilent Technologies, L4421A, MY00012345, 0.12-0.04-0.00-0.00
product
SYST:CTYP? 1
carrier firmware revision
carrier serial number
Agilent Technologies,L4421A, MY44000237, 2.16
product
sub-assembly firmware revision
sub-assembly serial number
SYST:DESC? 1
“64-bit Digital I/O Module with Memory and Counter”
Using the Instrument Web Interface
Each L4400 series instrument can be programmed using its Web- based
interface. The Web interface functions as a virtual front panel which can also
be used for:
• interactive control
• familiarization with instrument capabilities
• determining / changing instrument configuration
• troubleshooting and debugging
Comprehensive on- line help providing Web interface usage information is
available with each Web window.
The instrument Web interface can be opened from Agilent Connection Expert
as shown in Figure 2- 12. The Web interface can also be opened directly from a
Web browser by entering the instrument’s IP address or host name in the
browser’s ‘Address’ window.
28
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
Select the instrument /
open the Web interface
Figure 2-12. Opening the Instrument Web Interface.
L4400 User’s Guide
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
An example of the Web interface window is shown in Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13. L4450A Web Interface (Welcome Page).
Instruments on the network can be physically identified by selecting
Turn on Front Panel Identification Indicator within the Web interface.
This causes the instrument’s front panel LAN LED to flash continually until
Turn off Front Panel Identification Indicator is selected.
NOTE
Editing the Instrument’s LAN Settings
Once a communication path to the instrument has been opened, the
instrument’s LAN configuration can be viewed and modified using the Web
interface.
30
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
On the Web “welcome page”, click ‘View and Modify Configuration’. This opens
the configuration window shown in Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-14. Viewing LAN Configuration Settings from the Web Interface.
L4400 User’s Guide
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
Clicking ‘Modify Configuration’ opens the window shown in Figure 2- 15 which
allows you to edit the parameters shown.
Figure 2-15. Changing the Instrument LAN Interface Configuration.
Selecting “Help with this Page” on any Web interface window provides
NOTE
information on the use of the current Web interface page. Selecting “Help
with this Page”on the “Browser Web Control” page provides a listing of
the help contents.
LAN Configuration Command Summary
In addition to using the Web interface, the instrument’s LAN configuration can
be set/changed changed programmatically. Chapter 3, Table 3- 3 provides a
listing of the LAN configuration commands implemented by the L4400 series
instruments.
Refer to the L4400 Programmers Reference on the Product Reference CD- ROM
(p/n 34989-13601) for detailed information on the commands.
32
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
GPIB Configuration
The following information assumes the GPIB interface card has been
installed in your computer. If necessary, install the card as instructed by
the documentation provided with the card.
NOTE
The L4400 series instruments are available with an optional GPIB interface.
The steps required to configure L4400 instruments for use over GPIB include:
• connecting the GPIB cables
• adding the instrument to the GPIB interface configuration (using Agilent
Connection Expert)
• changing the instrument GPIB address (systems with multiple L4400
instruments)
• testing the IO path
Each L4400 series instrument is shipped from the factory with a default GPIB
address of 9. Because instruments on the GPIB bus must have unique
addresses, the L4400 instruments must be turned on one at a time, and the
GPIB address changed before the next instrument is turned on and added to
the configuration.
Connecting the GPIB Cables
GPIB cables can be connected in a “star” (all cables connect directly to the
computer) or “linear” (instrument to instrument) configuration.
For systems with multiple L4400 series instruments, turn on only one L4400
instrument at this time. If there is another instrument on the bus at GPIB
address 9 (i.e. 34980A), turn off that instrument until the address of the
current L4400 instrument is changed.
Starting Agilent Connection Expert
Start Agilent Connection Expert by clicking the Agilent Control icon and
selecting “Agilent Connection Expert” from the pop- up menu (Figure 2- 5).
The computer interfaces configured during installation of the Agilent IO
libraries are displayed in the left column (Explorer pane) including the GPIB
interface if a GPIB card is installed in your computer.
L4400 User’s Guide
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
Adding Instruments to the GPIB Configuration
Highlight the GPIB interface (GPIB0) and select “Add Instrument” on the tool
bar. Select the GPIB interface in the “Add Instrument” window and click ‘OK’.
Figure 2-16. Adding Instruments to the GPIB Interface.
In the ‘configurable properties’ window shown in Figure 2- 17, select GPIB
address 9 and click ‘OK’. This is the factory default address that will be
changed as necessary in the following steps.
Figure 2-17. Specifying the GPIB Address when Adding an Instrument.
34
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
Verifying the GPIB Path
In the Agilent Connection Expert window, select and open ‘Interactive IO’.
Verify communication to the instrument by sending the *IDN? command using
Send & Read below the command line.
Figure 2-18. GPIB Communication Using the Default GPIB Address.
The GPIB Address String
When programming the L4400 instruments over GPIB, the instrument’s GPIB
address is included in the address string. For example:
GPIB0::9::INSTR
Changing the GPIB Address
If you have only one L4400 instrument on the GPIB interface and there are no other
instruments on the bus, the L4400 instrument address can remain set to 9. If you have
multiple L4400 instruments or there is another GPIB instrument at address 9, then one of
the addresses must be changed.
The command used to set the GPIB address on all L4400 instruments is:
SYSTem:COMMunication:GPIB:ADDRess < address >
The command can be abbreviated by including only the upper-case letters in the com-
mand syntax. The Interactive IO window is used to set the GPIB address as shown in
L4400 User’s Guide
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
Figure 2-19. In this example, the GPIB address is set to 10.
Figure 2-19. Setting the GPIB Address Using the Interactive IO Window.
Once the address is changed within the instrument, the address must also be
changed in the Agilent Connection Expert’s “configuration tables.”
36
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
From the Agilent Connection Expert main window, highlight the instrument added and
then click ‘Change Properties ...”. Within the configurable properties window, change
the address of the instrument from ‘9’ to ‘10’ and click ‘OK’.
Highlight instrument and
select, change address to
‘10’.
Figure 2-20. Changing the GPIB Address within Configuration Expert.
Verifying the new GPIB Path
To verify the GPIB address change, you can close the Interactive IO window, select the
instrument, and reopen Interactive IO. Or, with Interactive IO remaining open, select
‘Connect’ and change the address from ‘9’ to ‘10’. Once connected to GPIB address
L4400 User’s Guide
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
‘10’, you can send the *IDN? command and verify the response from the instrument.
Figure 2-21. Connecting to GPIB Address 10 using Interactive IO.
Adding Additional Instruments
Additional instruments are added to the GPIB configuration using the process described
earlier. The steps are summarized as follows and assume the GPIB cable has been con-
nected between the computer and the new instrument.
1. Turn on the “next” L4400 instrument. Do not turn on those instruments whose
addresses are still set to the default address of ‘9’.
2. Open the Agilent Configuration Expert “Add Instrument” window and select the
instrument’s GPIB address in the “configurable properties” window (Figures 2-16 and
2-17).
3. Open the Agilent Connection Expert “Interactive IO” window (Figure 2-18). Change
the instrument’s GPIB address using the command:
SYSTem:COMMunication:GPIB:ADDRess < address >
4. Change the address in the Agilent Connection Expert’s configuration table to the new
instrument address (Figure 2-20).
5. Verify the communication path to the new address.
38
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
Firmware Updates
Firmware updates for the L4400 series instruments consist of updates to the
instrument carrier firmware, and if necessary, an update of the instrument
module firmware. The updates are made available via the Web. The firmware
is installed using the Agilent L4400 Firmware Update Utility, also available on
the web. This section contains information for locating and downloading the
update utility and firmware to your computer, and then using the utility to
install the firmware.
Downloading the Update Utility and Firmware
Firmware updates (if available) for the L4400 series instruments can be found
on the Web at:
www.agilent.com/find/L4400
Once this page is displayed, click on ‘Library’ under the heading “More
Details.” From the ‘Library’ window select:
√ L4400 Firmware Update Revision <revision number>
√ Documents & Downloads
√ Agilent L4400 Firmware Update Utility
Save the utility application to a directory (e.g. Temp) on your PC. Note the
directory location as you will need to install the utility from this location.
Installing the Firmware Update Utility
Downloading the firmware update utility copies the application to your PC but
does not install the utility. From the directory where the application was
saved, double-click the firmware update utility application (.exe file). For
example:
FirmwareUpdateUtility_B_01_09_V3.exe
This starts the application’s installation “wizard”. Follow the instructions as
prompted. This will create and install the utility in the directory:
C:\Program Files\Agilent\Firmware Update Utility
L4400 User’s Guide
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
Downloading and Installing the Instrument Firmware
Once the utility is saved, return to the Web page and click on:
Agilent Firmware Revision <revision number>
Save the firmware file to a directory on your PC (e.g. Temp). Note the directory
location as you will need to specify the path to the firmware file when you run
the firmware update utility.
When updating from the LAN interface, the update utility requires you to spec-
ify the instrument host name or IP address. Before running the utility, test the
communication path to the instrument(s) using Agilent Connection Expert.
Open Agilent Connection Expert and refresh the LAN and GPIB (if present)
interfaces by clicking ‘Refresh All’ (Figure 2- 10). A “√” in a green circle next to
the instrument indicates communication with the instrument on that inter-
face. Note the host names or IP addresses (assuming an update over the LAN
interface) of the instruments to receive firmware updates.
1. From the directory where the update utility was installed, start the utility by selecting
FirmwareUpdateUtility.exe.
40
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
Click ‘Next’ until the window shown in Figure 2-22 appears.
Figure 2-22. Firmware Update Utility Firmware File Selection.
2. Using the ‘Browse’ button, specify the path to the firmware file and then
click ‘Next’.
The ‘Applicable Model’ window lists the L4400 series instruments which
NOTE
are updateable by the current firmware (.xs) image. The window is
NOTused to select the instrument receiving the firmware update.
Firmware updates are performed on one instrument at a time. Once the
firmware update is complete, you must exit and re-start the utility to
update each instrument.
L4400 User’s Guide
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
3. Select the I/O interface to be used to upgrade the instrument firmware and
then select ‘Next’ (Figure 2- 23).
Figure 2-23. Selecting the Instrument Interface.
4. If the LAN interface is selected (Figure 2- 23), enter the instrument host
name or IP address and click ‘Update’. If the GPIB interface is used, select the
instrument’s GPIB address.
42
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
The firmware update process takes several minutes. The instrument’s front
panel ATTN indicator will flash green while the update is in progress.
enter host name
or IP address
Figure 2-23. Entering the Instrument Host Name or IP Address.
When the update to the instrument carrier firmware is complete, the results
are indicated as shown in Figure 2- 24. Note that an update of the instrument
sub- assembly firmware may continue for a few moments after the update
results message appears.
Instrument sub-assembly firmware updates are performed automatically if
the current sub-assembly firmware revision is incompatible with the
updated carrier firmware.
NOTE
L4400 User’s Guide
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
Figure 2-24. Instrument Firmware Update Complete.
5. Once the carrier update AND instrument sub-assembly update (if one
occurs) complete and no instrument activity is indicated by the front panel
LEDs, cycle power on the instrument. Once the power- on sequence completes,
select ‘Refresh All’ in the Agilent Connection Expert (Figure 2- 10).
Agilent Connection Expert may report that the instrument’s configuration has
changed. This is represented by a yellow triangle and an exclamation point (!)
next to the updated instrument. Select (highlight) the instrument name. Select
‘Change Properties...’ and then click either ‘Test Connection’ or ‘Identify
Instrument’ to update Agilent Connection Expert and then click ‘OK’. Repeat
for each updated instrument on the LAN and GPIB interfaces.
44
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Installation and Configuration
2
Instrument Power-On and Default LAN Configuration States
The L4400 series instruments covered in this user’s guide are set to their
power on and preset states using any one the following commands:
*RST
SYSTem:CPON 1
SYSTem:PRESet
Table 2- 3 lists the power-on and preset states for each instrument.
Table 2-3. L4400 Instrument Power-on and Preset States
Power-on Preset States
L4400 Series Instrument
L4421A 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer
All channels open
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
All channels open
2-wire/1-wire mode: no change
L4437A 32-Channel Form A/ Form C
General Purpose Switch
All channels open
L4445A Microwave Switch / Attenuator Driver
Channel drives enabled = user-
defined defaults
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O w/Memory and Counter
I/O ports = Input
Count = 0
Trace memory = cleared
L4451A 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter
w/Memory
DACs = 0Vdc
Trace wavforms = cleared
L4452A Multifunction with Digital I/O, D/A,
Totalizer
DIO Ports = Input
Count = 0
DACs = 0Vdc
LAN Reset (Default) Configuration
Pressing the “LAN Reset” button (recessed) on the L4400 instrument front or
rear panel restores the instrument’s default LAN configuration. Table 2- 4 lists
the default LAN configuration settings.
L4400 User’s Guide
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Software Installation and Configuration
Table 2-4. Default LAN Configuration Settings.
Default (Reset) Setting
LAN Parameter
DHCP
ON
ON
Automatic IP Addressing
IP Settings if DHCP Server
Unavailable
IP Address: 169.254.44.88 (default)
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0
DNS Server
0.0.0.0 (may be assigned by the DHCP server)
A-product number-last 5 digits of serial number
Host Name (registered with
DDNS if available)
LAN Keep Alive
1800 (seconds)
Ethernet Connection Monitoring
ON - instrument monitors its LAN connection;
will attempt to automatically reconnect if dis-
connected from network.
46
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
L4400 Instrument Front Panel Overview
LXI instruments within the the L4400 family consist of the instrument
carrier, an instrument sub- assembly, and if applicable, a wiring terminal
block. The front panel of an L4400 instrument is shown in Figure 3- 1.
Power
Instrument sub-assembly
LAN Reset
Instrument carrier
Figure 3-1. L4400 Instrument Front Panel (L4421A shown).
The only time it is necessary to remove the instrument sub- assembly from the
carrier is to attach a support sleeve to those sub-assemblies that use a wiring
terminal block.
Chapter 1 contains information for removing the sub- assembly from the
carrier and attaching the sleeve.
The LAN Reset Button
The LAN reset button allows you reset the instrument’s LAN configuration to
its default state. Refer to “LAN Reset (Default) Configuration” in Chapter 2
for a listing of the default settings.
The Front Panel LEDs
The front panel LEDs:
ATTN
LAN
PWR
provide information on the status of the instrument. Table 3-1 lists the
instrument’s status conditions based on the color and functioning of the
LEDs.
48
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
Table 3-1. L4400 LED Definitions and Instrument Status.
Condition
LED
ATTN
LAN
PWR
Color
Off
Off
Off
Instrument is not turned on, and may or may
not be connected to line power.
ATTN
LAN
PWR
flashing
flashing
Green
Power-on/boot-up. ATTN and LAN will flash
red and then green during the power-on
self-test.
ATTN
LAN
PWR
Off
Green
Green
LAN connection
- instrument has an IP address
ATTN
LAN
PWR
Off
Instrument identification. Activated from
instrument Web interface:
ON: Turn on Front Panel Interface Indicator
OFF: Turn off Front Panel Interface Indicator
Green (flashing)
Green
ATTN
LAN
PWR
Off
Red
Green
No LAN connection due to:
- disconnected LAN cable
- failure to acquire an IP address
- waiting for DHCP-assigned address
ATTN
LAN
PWR
Red (flashing)
Green
Green
Instrument programming error or self-test
error. Error queue is read using
SYSTem:ERRor?
ATTN
LAN
PWR
Green (flashing)
Green
Green
Instrument Busy State
- firmware download
- lengthy instrument operation in progress
L4400 User’s Guide
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
L4400 Instrument Rear Panel Overview
The rear panel of an L4400 series instrument is shown in Figure 3- 2. Note
that the ports and connectors available are based on the instrument’s
options and functionality.
LAN Reset
External Trigger/Alarm DIO Port
LAN Port
Power
GPIB Interface
(optional)
Analog Bus Port
Figure 3-2. L4400 Instrument Rear Panel (L4421A shown).
Analog Bus Port
The Analog bus port, available on the rear panel of the L4421A 40- Channel
Armature Multiplexer Module and the L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
Module, allows signals to be routed to external instruments such as digital
multimeters (DMMs). There are four busses (ABUS1 - ABUS 4) on the port.
Figure 3- 3 defines each bus and corresponding pin numbers.
ABus1 LO (pin 4)
ABus2 LO (pin 3)
ABus3 LO (pin 2)
ABus4 LO (pin 1)
Current
(L4421A only)
5
1
6
9
(2A Max.)
ABus4 HI (pin 6)
ABus3 HI (pin 7)
ABus2 HI (pin 8)
ABus1 HI (pin 9)
Figure 3-3. L4400 Analog Bus Port Pinouts.
See “Scanning with External Instruments” later in this chapter for
information on how the analog bus is used for scanning a channel list with an
external DMM.
50
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
Ext Trig/Alarms/DIO Port
The external trigger, alarms, and DIO port enables you to synchronize
scanning between a switching instrument such as the L4421A and an
external DMM. The port also allows you to output alarm signals to an
external device or control system. Figure 3- 4 shows the pin out and signal
definitions for the port.
Channel advance input
(Trig In - pin 6)
Alarm 1 output (pin 1)
Alarm 2 output (pin 2)
Channel closed output
(Trig Out - pin 5)
5
9
1
1
5
6
9
6
Gnd (pin 9)
Gnd (pin 9)
Alarm Usage
External Trigger Usage
Input
5 V
0 V
or
> 1 µs
Output
3.3 V
0 V
Approx. 2 µs
Figure 3-4. External Trigger and Alarm Port Pin Definitions.
GPIB Connector
The GPIB interface is available on all L4400 series instruments as
Option- GPIB. This option must be purchased with the product. Products not
ordered with the GPIB interface cannot be reconfigured to add it later.
LAN Port
The LAN port on the L4400 series instruments supports 10 Mbps and 100
Mbps data transfer rates (10BaseT/100BaseTx). The port is Non Auto- MDIX
which means that the LAN crossover cable supplied with the instrument
L4400 User’s Guide
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
must be used when connecting the L4400 instrument directly (without a
switch or router) to the computer. See “Connecting the LAN Cables” in
Chapter 2 for more information.
L4400 Series Channel Addressing Scheme
The channel addressing scheme for the L4400 series LXI instuments uses the
form 1ccc where ccc is the three- digit channel number. Following are
examples of the scheme. Refer to the individual instrument chapters for
more information on channel numbering.
Table 3-2. L4400 Series Channel Addressing Examples.
Definition
Channel Number
1014
1921
Channel 14 on Bank 1 of the L4421A multiplexer module.
Channel 921 (analog bus relay for ABUS 1) on Bank 2 of the
L4421A multiplexer module or on Matrix 2 of the L4433A matrix
module.
1304
1437
1201
Row 3 / column 4 on Matrix 1 of the L4433A matrix module
(2-wire mode).
Row 3 / column 7 on Matrix 4 of the L4433A matrix module
(1-wire mode).
Channel 201 on Bank 2 of the L4450A digital I/O module.
Introduction to the SCPI Command Language
The functions of the L4400 series instruments are programmed using SCPI
(Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands. The L4400
Programmer’s Reference located on the L4400 LXI Class C Instruments Prod-
uct Reference CD-ROM (p/n 34989- 13601), contains a complete description
of each instrument’s command set.
SCPI is an ASCII- based instrument command language designed for test and
measurement instruments. SCPI commands use a hierarchical structure, also
known as a tree system. In this system, associated commands are grouped
together under a common node or root, thus forming subsystems. A portion
of the ROUTe subsystem is shown below to illustrate the tree system.
ROUTe
:MONitor
[:CHANnel]:ENABle <mode>, (@<ch_list>)
[:CHANnel]:ENABle? (@<ch_list>)
52
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
ROUTe is the root keyword of the command, MONitor is a second- level key-
words, CHANnel is a third- level keyword, and so on. A colon ( : ) separates a
command keyword from a lower- level keyword.
Syntax Conventions
The SCPI syntax convention can be defined using the command shown below:
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PULSe:WIDTh {<seconds>|MIN|MAX|DEF},
(@<ch_list>)
Keywords
The command syntax shows that most commands (and some parameters) are
a mixture of upper- and lower- case letters. The upper-case letters indicate the
abbreviated spelling for the command. For shorter program lines, you can
send the abbreviated form. For better program readability, you can send the
long form.
For example, in the above syntax statement DRIV and DRIVE are both
acceptable forms. You can also use a combination of upper- and lower-case
letters. When sending a command, the abbreviated form or the complete
spelling of the command must be used. Any other combination will generate
a syntax error.
Braces and Vertical Bars
Braces ( { } ) enclose the parameter choices for a given command string. The
braces are not sent with the command string.
A vertical bar ( | ) separates multiple parameter choices for a given
command string.
Brackets
Triangle brackets ( < > ) indicate that you must specify a value for the
enclosed parameter. For example, the syntax statement shows the <seconds>
parameter enclosed in triangle brackets. The brackets are not sent with the
command string. You must specify a value for the parameter.
Optional Parameters
Some parameters are enclosed in square brackets ( [ ] ). This indicates that
the parameter is optional and can be omitted. The brackets are not sent with
the command string. If you do not specify a value for an optional parameter,
the instrument chooses a default value.
L4400 User’s Guide
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
Command Separators
A colon ( : ) is used to separate a command keyword from a lower-level key-
word. A blank space separates the keyword from the first parameter. If a
command has more than one parameter, the subsequent parameters are sep-
arated by commas as shown below:
ROUT:CHAN:DRIV:PULS:WIDTh 0.010, (@1201,1202)
Linking Commands
A semicolon ( ; ) is used to separate IEEE-448.2 common commands and
commands at the same “node” within the same subsystem. For example:
*RST; *CLS; *IDN?;
Also, sending the following command string:
COUN:GAT:POL NORM(@1301);SOUR EXT, (@1301)
is the same as sending the following two commands:
[SENSe:]COUNter:GATe:POLarity NORM(@1301)
[SENSe:]COUNter:GATe:SOURce EXT, (@1301)
This can occur since “POLarity” and “SOURce” are at the same node within
the [SENSe:]COUNter:GATe command.
A colon and a semicolon are used to link commands from different sub-
systems as shown below:
INP:IMP AUTO;:ROUT:CHAN:DEL 1
Using the MIN and MAX Parameters
For many commands, "MIN" or "MAX" can be used in place of a discrete
parameter value. For example:
ROUT:CHAN:DRIV:PULS:WIDTh MIN, (@1201,1202)
sets the MINimum pulse width (0.001) available for the command.
Querying Parameter Settings
Many SCPI commands have a complimentary command that allows you to
query the current value of the parameters. These commands are indicated by a
‘?’ in the command syntax. For example:
ROUT:CHAN:DRIV:PULS:WIDTh? (@1201)
queries the pulse with setting for channel 1201.
54
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
Specifying Channel Lists and Scan Lists
A command’s channel list (<ch_list>) or scan list (<scan_list>) parameter is
used to specify a single channel, multiple channels, or a range of channels. The
channel and scan lists must be preceded with the "@" symbol and must be
enclosed in parentheses. The following commands demonstrate how the chan-
nel list parameter is used:
ROUT:CLOS (@1010)
- close channel 10
ROUT:CLOS (@1010,1012,1015)
ROUT:CLOS (@1005:1010,1015)
- close channels 10, 12, and 15
- close channels 5-10, and 15
When specifying a range of channels, the first and last channels in the range
must be valid. Any invalid channels within the range are ignored (no error is
generated).
The Analog Bus relays (numbered 911, 912, 913, etc.) on the multiplexer and
matrix modules are ignored if they are included in a range of channels. An error
will be generated if an Analog Bus relay is specified as the first or last channel
in a range of channels.
Refer to “Scanning” later in this chapter for additional information
creating/using a scan list.
L4400 SCPI Command Summary
Table 3- 3 lists the SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments.
The SCPI commands unique to each instrument are summarized in the
instrument- specific chapters that follow Chapter 3.
For complete information on all commands, refer to the Programmer’s
Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD- ROM.
L4400 User’s Guide
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
Table 3-3. L4400 Series SCPI Command Summary.
Commands
Subsystem
*CLS
STATus
*ESE <enable_value>
*ESE?
*ESR?
*SRE <enable_value>
*SRE?
*STB?
STATus:MODule:ENABle <enable_value>
STATus:MODule:ENABle?
STATus:MODule:EVENt?
STATus:MODule:SLOT1:CONDition?
STATus:MODule:SLOT1:ENABle <enable_value>
STATus:MODule:SLOT1:ENABle?
STATus:MODule:SLOT1:EVENt]?
STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
STATus:OPERation:ENABle <enable_value>
STATus:OPERation:ENABle?
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
STATus:PRESet
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <enable_value>
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle?
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
SYSTem:MODule?
MEMory
*RCL {1|2|3|4|5}
(State Storage)
*SAV {1|2|3|4|5}
MEMory:NSTates?
MEMory:STATe:CATalog?
MEMory:STATe:DELete {1|2|3|4|5}
MEMory:STATe:DELete:ALL
MEMory:STATe:NAME {1|2|3|4|5} [,<name>]
MEMory:STATe:NAME? {1|2|3|4|5}
MEMory:STATe:RECall:AUTO {OFF|0|ON|1}
MEMory:STATe:RECall:AUTO?
MEMory:STATe:RECall:SELect {1|2|3|4|5}
MEMory:STATe:RECall:SELect?
MEMory:STATe:VALid? {1|2|3|4|5}
56
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
*CLS
IEEE-488
*ESE <enable_value>
*ESE?
Commands
*ESR?
*IDN?
*OPC
*OPC?
*RCL {1|2|3|4|5}
*RST
*SAV {1|2|3|4|5}
*SRE <enable_value>
*SRE?
*STB?
*TRG
*TST?
*WAI
*IDN?
*RST
*TST
SYSTem
(System-Related
Commands)
SYSTem:CDEScription[:LONG]? 1
SYSTem:CDEScription:SHORt? 1
SYSTem:COMMunicate:ENABle
{OFF|0|ON|1},{GPIB|LAN|SOCKets|TELNet|VXI11|WEB}
SYSTem:COMMunicate:ENABle? {GPIB|LAN|SOCKets|
TELNet|VXI11|WEB}
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess <address>
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess:INSTalled?
SYSTem:CPON 1
SYSTem:CTYPe? 1
SYSTem:DATE <yyyy>,<mm>,<dd>
SYSTem:DATE?
SYSTem:DELay[:IMMediate] <seconds>
SYSTem:ERRor?
SYSTem:LOCK:OWNer?
SYSTem:LOCK:RELease
SYSTem:LOCK:REQuest?
SYSTem:MODule?
SYSTem:PRESet
SYSTem:SECurity:IMMediate
SYSTem:TIME <hh>,<mm>,<ss.sss>
SYSTem:TIME?
SYSTem:VERSion?
L4400 User’s Guide
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:AUTOip {OFF|0|ON|1}
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:AUTOip?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:BSTatus?
SYSTem
(LAN Configuration)
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:CONTrol?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DHCP {OFF|0|ON|1}
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DHCP?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DNS “<address>”
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DNS?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DOMain "<name>"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:DOMain? [{CURRent|STATic}]
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATEway <address>
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATEway? [{CURRent|STATic}]
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:HISTory:CLEar
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:HISTory?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:HOSTname "<name>"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:HOSTname? [{CURRent|STATic}]
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress “<address>”
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress? [{CURRent|STATic}]
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:KEEPalive {<seconds>|MIN|MAX}
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:KEEPalive? [{MIN|MAX}]
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:MAC?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk “<mask>”
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk? [{CURRent|STATic}]
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TELNet:PROMpt "<string>"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TELNet:PROMpt?
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TELNet:WMESsage "<string>"
SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TELNet:WMESsage?
58
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
L4400 Series Programming Examples
The L4400 series Product Reference CD- ROM (part number 34989- 13601)
contains progamming examples to familiarize you with the operation of
selected L4400 instruments. Once communication paths to the instruments
have been set (Chapter 2), the examples can be used as an introduction to the
sequence of commands necessary to program the functions available with
the instruments.
The examples on the CD-ROM include multiple development environments
and demonstrate instrument programming via drivers and direct
programming through the I/O libraries. The drivers and I/O libraries used
include:
• IVI- C
• IVI- COM
• VISA
• VISA COM
To install the examples on your computer, insert the Product Reference
CD- ROM and click ‘Install’ next to “L4400 Programming Examples.” Follow
the instructions as prompted.
Once installed, the examples are located in the following (default) path and
are grouped into development environment directories:
C:\Program Files\Agilent\L4400\Examples
To select a specific example, open the environment directory under
“Examples” followed by the driver (IVI- COM, IVI- C) or IO library (VISA, VISA
COM) subdirectory.
The examples assume that you are familiar with the programming languages
demonstrated and the tools associated with the development environment.
Note that before you run a programming example, the program must be
edited to include the address string of your particular instrument. The
following sections provide instructions for editing the programs based on the
driver type and development environment.
Modifying IVI-COM Examples (.NET)
IVI- COM examples are available for the Microsoft C#.NET and Visual
Basic.NET development environments. To modify IVI- COM (C#) examples for
use with with your instrument, open the example in the \IVI- COM
subdirectory for your development environment by double- clicking the
example name with the .csproj extension.
L4400 User’s Guide
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
C#
Once the development environment opens, select the example source code
file (.cs extension) of the same name. Locate the “Initialize” function and
change the address string. Figure 3- 5 shows where the address string is
changed within the source code for program “MultifunctionExample.sln.
change address string
example source code
Figure 3-5. Changing the Instrument Address String (IVI-COM Programs).
Visual Basic.NET
When using the IVI- COM examples with Visual BASIC.NET, you are prompted
to enter/change the instrument’s address string after starting the program.
To modify IVI- COM Visual Basic examples for use with with your instrument,
open the example in the \IVI- COM subdirectory for your development
environment by double- clicking the example name with the .vbproj
extension.
60
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
Figure 3- 6 is an example of the window used during program execution to
change the address string.
click to start program
enter address string
Figure 3-6. Changing the Address String (IVI-COM / Visual Basic.NET).
Visual Basic 6.0
To modify IVI-COM examples with Visual Basic 6.0, open the example by
double- clicking the example name with the .vbp extension. When using
Visual BASIC 6.0, you are prompted to enter/change the instrument’s
address string after starting the program.
The Visual Basic 6.0 form is similar to that shown in Figure 3- 6.
Modifying IVI-C Examples
IVI- C examples are available for the Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0 environment. To
modify IVI-C examples for use with with your instrument, open the example
in the \IVI- C subdirectory of VC 60 by double-clicking the example name with
the .vcproj extension. Once the development environment opens, select the
example source code file (.cpp extension) of the same name.
L4400 User’s Guide
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
Locate “InitWithOptions” and change the address string as shown in the
example of Figure 3-7.
change address string
example source code
Figure 3-7. Changing the Instrument Address String (IVI-C Programs).
Modifying VISA and VISA COM Examples
Agilent VISA examples are available with the Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0 and
Visual Basic 6.0 environments. To modify VISA examples for use with with
your instrument, open the example in the \VISA subdirectory of the
development environment by double- clicking the example name with the .dsp
extension. Once the development environment opens, select the example
source code file (.c extension) of the same name.
62
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
Locate “DEFAULT_LOGICAL_ADDRESS” and change the address string as
shown in the example of Figure 3- 8.
double-click to view source code
change address string
Figure 3-8. Changing the Instrument Address String (VISA Programs).
Visual Basic 6.0
To modify VISA examples with Visual Basic 6.0, open the example by
double- clicking the example name with the .vbp extension. When using
Visual BASIC 6.0, you are prompted to enter/change the instrument’s
address string after starting the program.
The Visual Basic 6.0 form is similar to that shown in Figure 3- 6.
VISA COM Examples
VISA COM examples are available with the Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0
environment. To modify the examples, double-click the example name with
the .vbp extension.
L4400 User’s Guide
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
Once the Visual Basic environment opens, start the program using the
“Start” arrow shown in Figure 3- 9. The program prompts you for the
instrument address as shown.
“Start” arrow
IO address dialog box
Figure 3-9. Changing the Address String (VISA COM Programs).
Using L4400 Instruments in Agilent 34980A Applications
The L4400 series LXI instruments have counterparts that are available as
plug- in modules for the Agilent 34980A Multifunction Switch/Measure Unit.
Table 3- 4 lists the L4400 series instruments and the corresponding 34980A
products.
Table 3-4. Agilent L4400 Series and 34980A Module Cross Reference.
34980A Plug-In Module
34921A
L4400A Instrument
L4421A: 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer
L4433A: Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
L4437A: General Purpose Switch
L4445A: Microwave Switch/Attenuator
L4450A: 64-Bit Digital I/O
34933A
34937A
34945A
34950A
L4451A: 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter
L4452A: Multifunction Module
34951A
34952A
64
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
Because of the similarity in products, code and applications can be leveraged
and ported between an L4400 instrument and its 34980A module
counterpart.
Porting Applications
The programming examples on the L4400 Product Reference CD- ROM as well
as all application programs contain a function that opens a “session” to, and
initializes the instrument.
In addition to specifying the instrument’s address string, this initialization
function contains parmeters that query and reset the instrument when the
session is opened. These parameters are represented by true/false conditions
that either perform an ID query or reset (true) or do not (false).
By setting the ID query parameter of the (session) initialization function to
‘False’, the program can be ported between corresponding (L4400 and
34980A) instruments.
For example, in the IVI- COM programming example
MultfunctionExample.csproj, the instrument session is opened using the
function:
ID query
address string
host.Initialize("GPIB::9", false, true, standardInitOptions +
"," + driverSetupOptions);
reset
By setting the ID query parameter to ‘false’ as shown and changing the
address string as required, the example can be run using the L4452A
multifunction module or the 34952A multifunction module. Note that
channel addresses within the program must be changed accordingly. See
“L4400 Series Channel Addressing Scheme” for more information.
Modifying each of the programming examples on the L4400 Product
Reference CD- ROM in this manner allows the examples to be used by the
L4400 instruments and their 34980A counterparts.
Analog Bus Applications
Usage:
• L4421A 40- Channel Armature Multiplexer
• L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
This section provides important environmental and electrical considerations
that can affect analog bus usage on the L4421A and L4433A.
L4400 User’s Guide
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
Environmental Operating Conditions
The L4400 series instruments are designed to operate in a temperature range
of 0 °C to +55 °C with non-condensing humidity. The maximum humidity is
80% at 40 °C or higher. Do not use in locations where conductive dust or
electrolytic salt dust may be present.
The L4400 instruments should be operated in an indoor environment where
temperature and humidity are controlled. Condensation can pose a potential
shock hazard. Condensation can occur when the instrument is moved from a
cold to a warm environment, or if the temperature and/or humidity of the
environment changes quickly.
When used in pollution degree 1 conditions, the maximum voltage rating for
the Analog Buses is 300V. When used in pollution degree 2 conditions,
the maximum voltage rating is 100V. If conditions change, ensure that
condensation has evaporated and the instrument has thermally stabilized
until pollution degree 1 conditions are restored before turning on power to
the equipment.
Pollution Degree 1: No pollution or only dry, non-conductive pollution
occurs. The pollution has no influence (on insulation) (IEC 61010-1
2nd Edition).
NOTE
Pollution Degree 2: Normally only non-conductive pollution occurs.
NOTE
Occasionally, a temporary conductivity (leakage current between isolated
conductors) caused by condensation can be expected (IEC 61010-1
2nd Edition).
Electrical Operating Conditions
To avoid electric shock, turn off the L4400 instrument and disconnect or
de-energize all field wiring to the modules and the Analog Bus
connector before removing any module or slot cover.
WARNING
Transients
The Analog Buses are designed to safely withstand occasional transient
overvoltages up to 1000 Vpeak. Typically, these transient overvoltages result
from switching inductive loads or from nearby lightning strikes.
66
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
The lightning- caused transient overvoltages that may occasionally occur on
mains power outlets may be as high as 2500 Vpeak.
Do not connect the Analog Buses directly to a mains power outlet.
WARNING
If it is necessary to measure a mains voltage or any circuit where a
large inductive load may be switched, you must add signal conditioning
elements to reduce the potential transients before they reach the
Analog Buses.
High Energy Sources
The Analog Buses are designed to handle inputs up to their rated currents or
their rated powers, whichever is less. Under certain fault conditions, high
energy sources could provide substantially more current or power than the
instrument can handle. It is important to provide external current limiting,
such as fuses, if the inputs are connected to high- energy sources.
Install current limiting devices between high energy sources and the
module inputs.
CAUTION
Safety Interlock
The Safety Interlock feature prevents connections to the Analog Buses
if no terminal block or properly- wired cable is connected to the L4421A or
L4433A.
Normally, if you attempt to connect to the Analog Buses without a terminal
block or properly- wired cable connected, an error is generated. You can,
however, temporarily disable errors generated by the Safety Interlock
feature. This simulation mode may be useful during test system development
when you may not have connected any terminal blocks or cables to your
module.
The Safety Interlock feature is implemented in hardware on the modules
CAUTION
and cannot be circumvented. Regardless of whether the simulation mode
is enabled or disabled, all Analog Bus operations are prohibited as long as
no terminal block or properly-wired cable is connected to the module.
• When the simulation mode is enabled, the Analog Bus relays will appear
to close and open as directed. For example, no errors are generated if you
close an Analog Bus relay from the remote interface or Web Interface.
However, remember that the Safety Interlock feature prevents the actual
hardware state of the Analog Bus relays from being changed. When you
connect a terminal block or cable to the module, the Analog Bus relays
will open and close normally.
L4400 User’s Guide
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
• The simulation setting is stored in volatile memory and will be lost when
power is turned off. To re- enable the simulation mode after power has
been off, you must send the command again. The command used is:
SYSTem:ABUS:INTerlock:SIMulate {OFF|ON}
User-Defined Channel Labels
Usage:
• All L4400 series instruments
You can assign user- defined labels to any channel, including Analog Bus
channels on the L4421A and L4433A instruments. User- defined channel
labels are available for identification purposes only and cannot be used in
place of a channel number within a command string.
• When shipped from the factory, each channel is assigned a unique
factory- default label (cannot be overwritten). From the instruments’ Web
interfaces, the factory- default labels are displayed as the channel number
(e.g., “1001”, “1020”, etc.).
• If desired, you can assign the same user-defined label to multiple channels
within the same module or on different modules (i.e., channel labels are
not required to be unique).
• You can specify a label with up to 18 characters. You can use letters (A- Z),
numbers (0- 9), and the underscore character. If you specify a label with
more than the allowed 18 characters, it will be truncated (no error is
generated).
• From the Web Interface, a limited number of characters can be displayed
due to space constraints in the browser window. If the user- defined label
it too long to be displayed properly, it will be truncated (no error is
generated).
• All user- defined channel labels are stored in non- volatile memory,
and do not change when power has been off, after a Factory Reset (*RST
command), after an Instrument Preset (SYSTem:PRESet command), or
after a stored state is recalled (*RCL command).
The following command assigns a label (“TEST_PT_1”) to channel 3 in slot 1.
ROUT:CHAN:LABEL "TEST_PT_1",(@1003)
The following command clears the user- defined label previously assigned to
channel 3 in slot 1. The channel will now be identified by its factory default
label (e.g., “MUX CH BANK 1”, “MATRIX1 ROW3 COL4”,
“DIO BYTE 1”, etc.).
ROUT:CHAN:LABEL "",(@1003)
68
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
The following command clears all user-defined channel labels on the
instrument and restores the factory- default labels.
ROUT:CHAN:LABEL:CLEAR:MOD 1
Scanning Applications
Usage:
• L4421A 40- Channel Armature Multiplexer
• L4450A 64- Bit Digital I/O (digital input, counter channels only)
• L4452A Multifunction Module (digital input, totalizer channels only)
Channels on selected L4400 series instruments can be “scanned” by separate
devices such as a DMM. During a scan, the instrument channels are
connected to the device and a measurement/reading is made one channel at
a time. Once the measurement is complete, the scan advances to the next
channel in the list until the end of the scan list is reached and the number of
passes (sweeps) through the scan list is complete.
For scanning applications involving the L4421A and a DMM, readings are
stored on the DMM. For applications involving scans of the digital input and
counter channels of the L4450A and the digital input and totalizer channels
of the L4452A, readings are stored in L4450A/L4452A memory.
Scanning is not allowed with the other (L4433A, L4437A, L4445A) switching
instruments. Also, scan lists cannot include digital output channels or DAC
voltage channels.
Rules for Scanning
• Before you can initiate a scan, you must set up a scan list to include all
desired multiplexer or digital channels. Channels which are not in the
scan list are skipped during the scan. By default, channels are scanned in
ascending order. If your application requires non- ordered scanning of the
• You can store at least 500,000 scan readings in instrument
(L4450A/L4452A) memory and all readings are automatically time
stamped. If memory overflows, a status register bit is set and new
readings will overwrite the first (oldest) readings stored. The most recent
readings are always preserved. Using the DATA:REMove? or R? command
to retrieve readings during a scan REMOVES the readings from memory.
Using FETCh? after the scan completes retrieves the readings and the
readings also remain in instrument memory.
L4400 User’s Guide
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
• Each time you start a new scan, the instrument clears all readings
(including alarm data) stored in reading memory from the previous scan.
Therefore, the contents of memory are always from the most recent scan.
• The Analog Bus relays are automatically opened and closed as required
during the scan to place the signal on the analog bus. For example, with
the L4421A, all 2- wire measurements use the ABus1 (MEAS) relays; for
4- wire measurements, the ABus2 (SENS) relays are used in addition to the
ABus1 relays.
• When the scan is initiated, the instrument will open all channels in banks
that contain one or more channels in the scan list.
• In order to guarantee that no signals are connected to the Analog Buses
prior to the scan, the instrument will open all ABus1 relays (applies to all
banks in all slots). In banks that contain channels in the scan list, the
instrument will also open all ABus2 relays (regardless of whether 4- wire
measurements are involved). If no channels configured for 4- wire
measurements are included in the scan list, the state of the ABus2 relays
in the non- scanned banks is not altered.
• The state of the ABus3 and ABus4 relays is not altered and these relays
remain available for use during the scan. However, be sure to use
CAUTION when closing these relays on banks involved in the scan. While
the scan is running, any signals present on ABus3 and/or ABus4 will be
joined with the scanned measurement on ABus1 and ABus2.
• While the scan is running, the instrument prevents use of all channels in
banks that contain one or more channels in the specified scan list (these
channels are dedicated to the scan). In addition, the instrument prevents
use of all ABus1 and ABus2 relays on banks containing channels in the
scan list. If one or more channels configured for 4- wire measurements are
included in the scan list, then the rules for ABus2 relay operations are
extended to the non- scanned banks as well.
• If the ABus1 relay used for current measurements (channel 931 on
L4421A only) is not closed prior to the initiation of the scan, the four
current channels (channels 41 through 44) are not affected by the scan.
However, if the ABus1 relay is closed, the instrument will open the ABus1
relay as well as the four associated current channels in a
make- before- break fashion.
• When you add a digital read (digital modules) to a scan list, the
corresponding channel is dedicated to the scan. The instrument issues a
Card Reset to make that channel an input channel (the other channel is
not affected).
• While the scan is running, you can perform low-level control operations
on any channels on the digital modules that are not in the scan.
For example, you can output a DAC voltage or write to a digital channel
(even if the totalizer is part of the scan list). However, you cannot change
any parameters that affect the scan (channel configuration,
scan interval, Card Reset, etc.) while a scan is running.
70
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
• If a scan includes a read of the totalizer, the count is reset each time it is
read during the scan only when the totalizer reset mode is enabled.
• At the end of the scan, the last channel that was scanned will be opened
(as well as any Analog Bus relays used during the scan).
Any channels that were opened during the scan will remain open at
the completion of the scan.
• If you abort a scan that is running, the instrument will terminate any
reading in progress (readings are not cleared from memory). If a scan is in
progress when the command is received, the scan will not be completed
and you cannot resume the scan from where it left off.
Note that if you initiate a new scan, all readings are cleared from memory.
• The Monitor mode is automatically enabled on all channels that are part
• The present scan list is stored in volatile memory and will be lost when
power is turned off or after a Factory Reset (*RST command).
Creating the Scan List
Usage:
• L4421A 40- Channel Armature Multiplexer
• L4450A 64- Bit Digital I/O (digital input, counter channels only)
• L4452A Multifunction Module (digital input, totalizer channels only)
A scan list is created as follows:
• Use the ROUTe:SCAN command to define the list of channels in the scan
list. To determine what channels are currently in the scan list, use the
ROUTe:SCAN? query command.
• To add channels to the present scan list, use the ROUTe:SCAN:ADD
command. To remove channels from the present scan list, use the
ROUTe:SCAN:REMove command.
• To remove all channels from the scan list, send “ROUT:SCAN (@)”.
• To initiate a scan, use the INITiate or READ? command. Each time you
initiate a new scan, the instrument will clear the previous set of readings
from memory.
To stop a scan in progress, use the ABORt command.
L4400 User’s Guide
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
Scan Trigger Source
Usage:
• L4421A 40- Channel Armature Multiplexer
• L4450A 64- Bit Digital I/O (digital input, counter channels only)
• L4452A Multifunction Module (digital input, totalizer channels only)
You can configure the event or action that controls the onset of each sweep
through the scan list (a sweep is one pass through the scan list):
• You can set the instrument’s internal timer to automatically scan at a
specific interval. You can also program a time delay between channels in
• You can start a scan when an external TTL trigger pulse is received.
• You can start a scan when an alarm event (L4450A, L4452A) is logged on
the channel being monitored.
Interval Scanning
In this configuration, you control the frequency of scan sweeps by selecting a
wait period from the start of one trigger to the start of the next trigger (called
the trigger- to- trigger interval). If the scan interval is less than the time
required to measure all channels in the scan list, the instrument will scan
continuously, as fast as possible (no error is generated).
Trigger 1
Trigger 2
Sweep 1
Sweep 2
Sweep n
. . .
t
Trigger Timer
(0 to 359,999 seconds)
Figure 3-10. Trigger-to-Trigger Interval.
• You can set the scan interval to any value between 0 seconds and 99:59:59
hours (359,999 seconds), with 1 ms resolution.
• Once you have initiated the scan, the instrument will continue scanning
until you stop it or until the trigger count is reached. See “Trigger
72
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
• Mx+B scaling and alarm limits (L4450A, L4452A) are applied to
measurements during a scan and all data is stored in volatile memory.
• The CONFigureand MEASure?commands (L4450A, L4452A) automatically
set the scan interval to immediate (0 seconds) and the scan count to 1
sweep.
• The instrument sets the scan interval to immediate (0 seconds) after a
Factory Reset (*RST command). An Instrument Preset (SYSTem:PRESet
command) or Card Reset (SYSTem:CPON command) does not change
the setting.
The following program segment configures the instrument for an interval
scan.
TRIG:SOURCE TIMER
TRIG:TIMER 5
TRIG:COUNT 2
INIT
Select interval time mode
Set the scan interval to 5 seconds
Sweep the scan list 2 times
Initiate the scan
Note: To stop a scan, send the ABORt command.
Manual Scanning
In this configuration, the instrument waits for a command before sweeping
through the scan list.
• All readings from the scan are stored in volatile memory.
Readings accumulate in memory until the scan is terminated
(until the trigger count is reached or until you abort the scan).
• You can specify a trigger count which sets the number of scan trigger
commands that will be accepted before terminating the scan. See
• Mx+B scaling and alarm limits (L4450A, L4452A) are applied to
measurements during a manual scanning operation and all data is stored
in volatile memory.
The following program segment configures the instrument for a manual
scanning operation.
TRIG:SOURCE BUS
TRIG:COUNT 2
INIT
Select bus (manual) mode
Sweep the scan list 2 times
Initiate the scan
Then, send the *TRG (trigger) command to begin each scan sweep.
Note: To stop a scan, send the ABORt command.
L4400 User’s Guide
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
Scanning on Alarm
Usage:
• L4450A 64- Bit Digital I/O (counter channels only)
• L4452A Multifunction Module (totalizer channels only)
In this configuration, the instrument initiates a scan each time a reading
crosses an alarm limit on a channel. You can also assign alarms to channels
on the digital modules. For example, you can generate an alarm when a
specific bit pattern or bit pattern change is detected on a digital input
channel or when a specific count is reached on a totalizer channel.
For complete details on configuring and using alarms, refer to
NOTE
• In this scan configuration, you can use the Monitor function to
continuously take readings on a selected channel and wait for an alarm on
that channel. Channels do not have to be part of an active scan list to be
monitored; however, the channel must be configured for a measurement in
order to be monitored.
• All readings from the scan are stored in the instrument’s volatile memory.
Readings accumulate in memory until the scan is terminated
(until the trigger count is reached or until you abort the scan).
• You can specify a trigger count which sets the number of scan trigger
commands that will be accepted before terminating the scan. See
• Mx+B scaling and alarm limits are applied to measurements during a
manual scanning operation and all data is stored in volatile memory.
The following program segment configures the instrument to continuously
scan when an alarm is detected.
TRIG:SOURCE ALARM1
TRIG:SOURCE:ALARM CONT
Select alarm configuration
Select continuous scan mode
CALC:LIM:UPPER 10.25,(@1003)
CALC:LIM:UPPER:STATE ON,(@1003)
OUTPUT:ALARM1:SOURCE (@1003)
Set upper alarm limit
Enable alarms
Report alarms on Alarm 1
ROUT:MON:CHAN (@1003)
ROUT:MON:CHAN:ENABLE ON,(@1003)
ROUT:MON:STATE ON
Select monitor channel
Enable monitoring on channel
Enable monitor mode
INIT
Initiate the scan
74
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
Note: To stop a scan, send the ABORt command.
Externally Triggering a Scan
In this configuration, the instrument sweeps through the scan list once each
time a low- going TTL pulse is received on the rear- panel Ext Trig Input line
(pin 6).
• You can specify a scan count which sets the number of external pulses the
instrument will accept before terminating the scan. See “Trigger Count”
for more information.
• If the instrument receives an external trigger before it is ready to accept
one, it will buffer one trigger and then ignore any additional triggers
received (no error is generated).
• All readings from the scan are stored in volatile memory.
Readings accumulate in memory until the scan is terminated
(until the scan count is reached or until you abort the scan).
• Mx+B scaling and alarm limits are applied to measurements during the
scan and all data is stored in volatile memory.
The following program segment configures the instrument for an external
scan.
TRIG:SOURCE EXT
TRIG:COUNT 2
INIT
Select external mode
Sweep the scan list 2 times
Initiate the scan
Note: To stop a scan, send the ABORt command.
Trigger Count
Usage:
• L4421A 40- Channel Armature Multiplexer
• L4450A 64- Bit Digital I/O (digital input, counter channels only)
• L4452A Multifunction Module (digital input, totalizer channels only)
You can specify the number of triggers that will be accepted by an instrument
before returning to the “idle” state. The trigger count applies to both
scanning and non-scanning applications.
• Select a trigger count between 1 and 500,000 triggers, or continuous.
L4400 User’s Guide
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
• You can store at least 500,000 readings in memory and all readings are
automatically time stamped. If memory overflows, the new readings will
overwrite the first (oldest) readings stored; the most recent readings are
always preserved.
• You can specify a trigger count in conjunction with a sweep count. The two
parameters operate independent of one another, and the total number of
readings returned will be the product of the two parameters.
• The CONFigure and MEASure? commands automatically set the scan
trigger count to 1.
• The instrument sets the scan trigger count to 1 after a Factory Reset (*RST
command). An Instrument Preset (SYSTem:PRESet command) or Card
Reset (SYSTem:CPON command) does not change the setting.
The following command sets the trigger count:
TRIGger:COUNt
To configure a continuous scan, send TRIG:COUNT INFINITY.
Sweep Count
Usage:
• L4450A 64- Bit Digital I/O (digital input, counter channels only)
• L4452A Multifunction Module (digital input, totalizer channels only)
The sweep count sets the number of sweeps per trigger event during a scan (a
sweep is one pass through the scan list).
Trigger
Sweep 1
Sweep 2
Trigger
Sweep n
. . .
t
Sweep Count
(1 to 500,000 sweeps)
Figure 3-11. Sweep Count Diagram.
• The sweep count is valid only while scanning. If no channels have been
assigned to the scan list, the specified sweep count is ignored (no error is
generated).
76
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
• You can specify a sweep count in conjunction with a trigger count and a
sample count. The three parameters operate independent of one another,
and the total number of readings returned will be the product of the three
parameters.
• You can store at least 500,000 readings in memory and all readings are
automatically time stamped. If memory overflows, the new readings will
overwrite the first (oldest) readings stored; the most recent readings are
always preserved.
• The CONFigure and MEASure? commands automatically set the sweep
count to 1 sweep.
• The instrument sets the sweep count to 1 after a Factory Reset
(*RST command). An Instrument Preset (SYSTem:PRESet command) or
Card Reset (SYSTem:CPON command) does not change the setting.
The following command sets the sweep count:
SWEep:COUNt
Channel Delay
Usage:
• L4421A 40- Channel Armature Multiplexer
You can control the pacing of a scan sweep by inserting a delay between the
L4421A channels in the scan list (useful for high- impedance or
high- capacitance circuits). The delay occurs following relay closure and any
inherent settling time, and before the generation of the “channel closed”
signal that would externally trigger a separate DMM (see “Scanning with
External Instruments”).
L4400 User’s Guide
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
Scan List
t
t
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch 4
Ch 5
Ch 6
t1
t2
t3
t4
t5
t6
Channel Delay
(0 to 60 seconds)
Figure 3-12. Channel Delay.
• You can set the channel delay to any value between 0 seconds and
60 seconds, with 1 ms resolution. You can select a different delay for each
channel.
• You can select a unique delay for every channel on the module.
• The channel delay is valid only while scanning. If no channels have been
assigned to the scan list, the specified channel delay is ignored (no error is
generated).
• The default channel delay is 0.0 seconds.
• A Factory Reset (*RST command) sets the channel delay to 0.0s.
The following command adds a 2- second channel delay to the specified
channels.
ROUT:CHAN:DELAY 2,(@1003,1013)
78
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
Reading Format
Usage:
• L4450A 64- Bit Digital I/O (digital input, counter channels only)
• L4452A Multifunction Module (digital input, totalizer channels only)
During a scan, the instrument automatically adds a time stamp to all
readings and stores them in memory. Each reading is stored with
measurement units, time stamp, channel number, and alarm status
information. You can specify which information you want returned with the
readings.
• The reading format applies to all readings being removed from the
instrument from a scan; you cannot set the format on a per- channel basis.
• The CONFigureand MEASure?commands automatically turn off the units,
time, channel, and alarm information.
• The format settings are stored in volatile memory and will be lost when
power is turned off or after a Factory Reset (*RST command).
The following commands to select the reading format.
FORMat:READing:ALARm ON
FORMat:READing:CHANnel ON
FORMat:READing:TIME ON
FORMat:READing:TIME:TYPE {ABSolute|RELative}
FORMat:READing:UNIT ON
Non-Sequential Scanning
Usage:
• L4421A 40- Channel Armature Multiplexer
• L4450A 64- Bit Digital I/O (digital input, counter channels only)
• L4452A Multifunction Module (digital input, totalizer channels only)
By default, channels are scanned in ascending order. If your application
requires non- ordered scanning of the channels in the present scan list, you
can use the non- sequential scanning mode.
• When sequential scanning is enabled (default), the channels in the scan
list are placed in ascending order.
• When sequential scanning is disabled (OFF), the channels remain in the
order presented in the scan list. Multiple occurrences of the same channel
are allowed. For example, (@1001, 1001, 1001) and
(@1010,1003,1001,1005) are valid and the channels will be scanned in the
order presented.
L4400 User’s Guide
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
• If you define a scan list with the sequential mode enabled and later
disable the mode, the scan list will not be reordered; however, the scan list
will be treated as a non-sequential list thereafter.
• If you have defined a scan list with the sequential mode disabled (OFF)
and later enable the mode, the channels will be reordered.
• Non- sequential scan lists are not stored as part of the instrument state by
the *SAVcommand; in this case, the ordered mode will be enabled and the
scan list will be empty when the instrument state is restored (*RCL
command).
• The scan order setting is stored in volatile memory and the ordered mode
will be enabled when power is turned off or after a Factory Reset (*RST
command).
The command used to control the order of the scan list is:
ROUTe:SCAN:ORDered {OFF|ON}
Monitor Mode
Usage:
• L4450A 64- Bit Digital I/O (digital input, counter channels only)
• L4452A Multifunction Module (digital input, totalizer channels only)
In the Monitor mode, the instrument takes readings as often as it can on a
single channel or during a scan. This feature is useful for troubleshooting
your system before a test or for watching an important signal.
• Any channel that can be “read” by a device can be monitored. This
includes the digital input, totalizer, and the counter channels.
• Readings acquired during a Monitor are not stored in memory. However,
all readings from a scan in progress at the same time are stored in
memory.
• The Monitor mode is equivalent to making continuous measurements
on a single channel with an infinite scan count. Only one channel can be
monitored at a time but you can change the channel being monitored at
any time.
• A scan in progress always has priority over the Monitor function.
• Channels do not have to be part of an active scan list to be monitored;
however, the channel must be configured for a measurement in order to be
monitored.
• The Monitor mode ignores all trigger settings and takes continuous
readings on the selected channel using the IMMediate (continuous)
source.
80
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
• The Monitor mode is automatically enabled on all channels that are part
of the active scan list. If you define the scan list after monitoring has
already been enabled, any channels that are not part of the active scan list
will be ignored during the monitor operation (no error is generated).
• Mx+B scaling and alarm limits are applied to the selected channel during a
Monitor and all alarm data is stored in the alarm queue (which will be
cleared if power fails).
• You can monitor a digital input channel or totalizer channel even if the
channel is not part of the scan list. The count on a totalizer channel is not
reset when it is being monitored (the Monitor ignores the totalizer reset
mode).
The following command is used to enable the channel Monitor mode
(default):
ROUTe:MONitor:MODE CHAN
The following program segment selects the channel to be monitored (single
channel only) and enables the Monitor function.
ROUTE:MON:CHAN (@1003)
ROUTE:MON:CHAN:ENABLE ON,(@1003)
ROUTE:MON:STATE ON
To read the monitor data from the selected channel, send the following
command. Each reading is returned with measurement units, time stamp,
page 79).
ROUTe:MONitor:DATA?
Scanning with External Instruments
Usage:
• L4421A 40- Channel Armature Multiplexer
A common application of the the L4421A is to scan the multiplexer channels
using a “separate” instrument such as a DMM. The DMM can be connected to
the multiplexer’s COM terminals on its terminal block (Figure 3- 13), or it can
be connected and synchronized using the multiplexer’s “Analog Busses” and
“Ext Trig” ports.
L4400 User’s Guide
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
DMM
Input
Channels
Common Terminals
(COM)
H
L
Figure 3-13. Scanning with External Instruments.
Figure 3- 14 shows the connections required to make a series (scan) of
two- wire measurements (e.g. ohms, DCV) using ABus1 of the L4421A .
Sequence The L4421A outputs a Channel Closed pulse on pin 5 of its Ext
Trig connector when a relay is closed and has fully settled (including any
channel delay). By connecting this pin to the DMM’s external trigger (Ext
Trig) input, the DMM is triggered to take a measurement. When the
measurement is complete, the DMM outputs a pulse from its DMM (VM
Complete) output. Connecting this output to pin 1 (Channel Advance) of the
L4421A’s Ext Trig connector advances the scan and closes the next channel
in the scan list.
82
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
This handshake sequence continues until all channels are scanned and the
programmed number of passes (sweeps) through the scan list are complete.
DMM
L4421A
ABus1-Lo
HI
HI
5
9
1
LO
LO
6
I
VM Complete
(Out)
Ext Trig
(In)
ABus1-Hi
Channel closed (out)
5
Channel advance (in)
1
6
9
Gnd
Figure 3-14. External Scanning Using the L4421A and a DMM.
• In this configuration, you must set up a scan list to include all desired
multiplexer channels. Channels which are not in the list are skipped
during the scan.
• You can configure the event or action that controls the onset of each
sweep through the scan list (a sweep is one pass through the scan list).
The selected source is used for all channels in the scan list. For more
• You can configure the event or action that notifies the instrument to
advance to the next channel in the scan list. Note that the Channel
Advance source shares the same sources as the (scan) trigger. However, an
error is generated if you attempt to set the channel advance source to the
same source (other than IMMediate) used for the scan trigger.
• You can specify the number of times the instrument will sweep through
the scan list. When the specified number of sweeps have occurred, the
L4400 User’s Guide
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
• You can configure the list of channels for 4-wire external scanning. When
enabled, the instrument automatically pairs channel n in Bank 1 with
channel n+20 in Bank 2 to provide the source and sense connections. For
example, make the source connections to the HI and LO terminals on
channel 2 in Bank 1 and the sense connections to the HI and LO terminals
on channel 22 (or 37) in Bank 2.
To configure the instrument for 4-wire external scanning, send the following
command.
ROUTe:CHANnel:FWIRe {OFF|ON}, (@<ch_list>)
The following program segment configures a separate DMM and the L4421A
for one pass through a scan list of 10 channels (Figure 3-14).
CONF:RES AUTO, DEF
TRIG:SOUR EXT
TRIG:COUN 10
INIT
Configure DMM function (resistance)
Set DMM trigger source
Set DMM trigger count
Put DMM in wait-for-trigger state
ROUT:SCAN (@1001:1010)
ROUT:CHAN:ADV:SOUR EXT
INIT
Set L4421A scan list
Set L4421A channel advance source
Initiate the scan (close first channel)
The L4400 Product Reference CD-ROM (p/n 34989-13601) included with the
L4400 instruments contains complete examples (VISA, VISA-COM, IVI-COM)
of scanning L4421A channels using a separate DMM. The example is in the
folder “Mux_L4421A.”
Alarm Limits
Usage:
• L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O (digital input, counter channels only)
• L4452A Multifunction Module (digital input, totalizer channels only)
You can configure the instrument to generate an alarm when a specific
bit pattern or bit pattern change is detected on a digital input channel
or when a specific count is reached on a totalizer channel of the L4450A and
L4452A. These channels do not have to be part of the scan list to generate an
alarm. Alarms are evaluated continuously as soon as you enable them.
There are two alarm paths that can be configured to alert you when specific
alarm conditions are encountered during a scan. You can assign multiple
channels to either of the two available alarms (ALARm1, ALARm2).
Alarm data can be stored in one of two locations depending on whether a
scan is running when the alarm occurs.
84
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
• If an alarm event occurs on a channel as it is being scanned, then that
channel’s alarm status is stored in instrument memory as the readings are
taken. Each reading that is outside the specified alarm limits is logged in
memory. You can store at least 500,000 readings in memory during
a scan. You can read the contents of instrument memory at any time, even
during a scan. Instrument memory is not cleared when you read it.
• As alarm events are generated, they are also logged in an alarm queue,
which is separate from instrument memory. This is the only place where
non- scanned alarms get logged (alarms generated by the digital modules).
Up to 20 alarms can be logged in the alarm queue. If more than 20 alarm
events are generated, they will be lost (only the first 20 alarms are saved).
Even if the alarm queue is full, the alarm status is still stored in reading
memory during a scan. The alarm queue is cleared by the *CLS (clear
status) command, when power is cycled, and by reading all of the entries.
A Factory Reset (*RSTcommand) or instrument preset (SYSTem:PREset)
does not clear the alarm queue.
• You can assign an alarm to any configured channel and multiple channels
can be assigned to the same alarm number. However, you cannot assign
alarms on a specific channel to more than one alarm number.
• When an alarm occurs, the instrument stores relevant information about
the alarm in the queue. This includes the reading that caused the alarm,
the time of day and date of the alarm, and the channel number on which
the alarm occurred. The information stored in the alarm queue is always
in absolute time format and is not affected by the
FORMat:READing:TIME:TYPE command setting.
• You must configure the channel before setting any alarm limits. If you
change the measurement configuration, alarms are turned off and the
limit values are cleared.
• If you plan to use scaling on a channel which will also use Mx+B scaling
(L4450A counter function), be sure to configure the scaling values first. If
you attempt to assign the alarm limits first, the instrument will turn off
alarms and clear the limit values when you enable scaling on that channel.
If you specify a custom measurement label with scaling, it is automatically
used when alarms are logged on that channel.
• If you redefine the scan list, alarms are no longer evaluated on those
channels (during a scan) but the limit values are not cleared. If you decide
to add a channel back to the scan list (without changing the function), the
original limit values are restored and alarms are turned back on. This
makes it easy to temporarily remove a channel from the scan list without
entering the alarm values again.
L4400 User’s Guide
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
• Two TTL alarm outputs are available on the rear- panel Alarms connector
(Figure 3- 4). You can use these hardware outputs to trigger external alarm
lights, sirens, or send a TTL pulse to your control system. You can also
initiate a scan sweep (no external wiring required) when an alarm event is
logged on a channel. For complete details, refer to “Using the Alarm
• A Factory Reset (*RSTcommand) clears all alarm limits and turns off all
alarms. An Instrument Preset (SYSTem:PRESet command) or Card Reset
(SYSTem:CPON command) does not clear the alarm limits and does not
turn off alarms.
• The channel numbering scheme for the digital input and totalizer
channels is shown below.
Digital Input Channel Numbering Totalizer Channel Numbering
L4450A
L4452A
1101 through 1104
1201 through 1204
1301, 1302
1001 through 1004
1005
• Pattern comparisons always start on the lowest- numbered channel in the
bank and extend to all channels involved in the channel width.
• Alarms are evaluated continuously on the digital modules, but alarm data
is stored in reading memory only during a scan.
• Each time you start a new scan, the instrument clears all readings
(including alarm data) stored in reading memory from the previous scan.
However, alarm data stored in the alarm queue from the digital modules is
not cleared. Therefore, although the contents of reading memory are
always from the most recent scan, the alarm queue may contain data that
occurred during previous scans or while the instrument was not scanning.
To assign the alarm number to report any alarm conditions on the specified
digital input channels, use the following command.
OUTPut:ALARm[1|2]:SOURce (@<ch_list>)
To configure alarms on the specified digital input channel, use the following
commands (also see the example below).
CALCulate
:COMPare:TYPE {EQUal|NEQual},(@<ch_list>)
:COMPare:DATA <data>,(@<ch_list>)
:COMPare:MASK <mask>,(@<ch_list>)
Select EQUal to generate an alarm when the data read from the port
is equal to CALC:COMP:DATA after being masked by CALC:COMP:MASK.
Select NEQual(not equal) to generate an alarm when the data read from the
port is not equal to CALC:COMP:DATAafter being masked by CALC:COMP:MASK.
86
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
Use CALC:COMP:MASK to designate the “don’t care” bits. Bits that you set
to “0” in the mask are ignored. To enable the specified alarm mode,
send the following command.
CALCulate:COMPare:STATe ON,(@<ch_list>)
Example: Configuring an Alarm on a Digital Input
The following program segment sets the digital pattern for the L4450A and
then enables the pattern comparison mode. When the data read from the
bank is equal to the comparison pattern, an alarm is generated on Alarm 2.
CALC:COMP:DATA:WORD #HF6,(@1201)
CALC:COMP:TYPE EQUAL,(@1201)
OUTP:ALARM2:SOUR (@1201)
Set compare pattern (1111 0110)
Generate alarm on match
Enable alarms
CALC:COMP:STAT ON,(@1201)
Enable pattern compare mode
To assign the alarm number to report any alarm conditions on the specified
totalizer channels, use the following command.
OUTPut:ALARm[1|2]:SOURce (@<ch_list>)
To configure an alarm on a totalizer channel, specify the desired count
as the upper limit using the following command.
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer <count>,(@<ch_list>)
To enable the upper limit on the specified totalizer channel, use the following
command.
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:STATe ON,(@<ch_list>)
Viewing Stored Alarm Data
If an alarm occurs on a channel as it is being scanned, then that channel’s
alarm status is stored in reading memory as the readings are taken.
As alarm events are generated, they are also logged in an alarm queue, which
is separate from reading memory. This is the only place where non- scanned
alarms get logged (alarms generated by the digital modules).
The following command reads data from the alarm queue (one alarm event is
read and cleared each time this command is executed).
SYSTem:ALARm?
The following command retrieves scanned readings and alarm data from
reading memory (the readings are not erased).
FETCh?
L4400 User’s Guide
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
Using the Alarm Output Lines
As mentioned, there are two TTL alarm lines available on the rear- panel
Alarms connector. Each alarm output line represents the logical “OR” of all
channels assigned to that alarm number (an alarm on any of the associated
channels will pulse the line). The connector is shown below:
Alarm 1 output (pin 1)
Alarm 2 output (pin 2)
5
1
or
9
6
Gnd (pin 9)
Figure 3-15. The L4400 Series Rear Panel Alarm Connector.
You can configure the behavior of the alarm output lines as follows. The
configuration that you select is used for both alarm output lines. A Factory
Reset (*RSTcommand) clears the alarm outputs but does not clear the alarm
queue in either configuration.
• Latch Mode: In this mode, the corresponding output line is latched true
when the first alarm occurs and remains asserted until you clear it by
initiating a new scan or cycling power. You can manually clear the output
lines at any time (even during a scan) and the alarm data in memory is not
cleared (however, data is cleared when you initiate a new scan).
• Track Mode: In this mode, the corresponding output line is asserted only
when a reading crosses a limit and remains outside the limit. When a
reading returns to within limits, the output line is automatically cleared.
You can manually clear the output lines at any time (even during a scan)
and the alarm data in memory is not cleared (however, data is cleared
when you initiate a new scan). The alarm outputs are also cleared when
you initiate a new scan.
• You can control the slope of the pulse from the alarm outputs (the selected
configuration is used for both outputs). In the falling edge mode, 0V (TTL
low) indicates an alarm. In the rising edge mode, +5V (TTL high) indicates
an alarm. A Factory Reset (*RSTcommand) will reset the slope to falling
edge.
Note: Changing the slope of the output lines may cause the lines to change
state.
88
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
To clear the specified output line (or to clear both lines), use one of the
following commands.
OUTPUT:ALARM2:CLEAR
OUTPUT:ALARM:CLEAR:ALL
Clear alarm output line 2
Clear both alarm outputs
To select the output configuration for the output lines, use the following
command.
OUTPut:ALARm:MODE {LATCh|TRACk}
To configure the slope of the output lines, use the following command.
OUTPut:ALARm:SLOPe {NEGative|POSitive}
Using Sequences
Usage:
• All L4400 Series Instruments
This section gives information on defining and executing a sequence,
which is a compiled series of SCPI commands stored in non-volatile memory
and identified by a user- defined name. Sequences can be used in a variety of
applications, such as creating a signal path from a device-under- test to a
measurement device or sequencing relays in a specified order. You can also
uses sequences in conjunction with other operations to configure and
synchronize complex measurements without having to send the routing
commands each time.
The following tables summarizes the commands used to define, execute, and
manage sequences. For more information, see the Programmer’s Reference
Help file on the L4400 series Product Reference CD- ROM.
Sequence Definition
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine <name>, "<commands>" Defines a sequence.
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine? <name>
Returns sequence definition.
Sequence Execution
ROUTe:SEQuence:ABORT
ROUTe:SEQuence:BUSY?
ROUTe:SEQuence:RUNNing:NAME?
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger[:IMMediate]
ROUTe:SEQuence:WAIT
Terminates currently-running sequence.
Returns “1” if sequence is executing (busy).
Returns name of currently-running sequence.
Executes specified sequence.
Blocks until sequence has completed.
L4400 User’s Guide
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
Sequence Management
ROUTe:SEQuence:CATalog?
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete:ALL
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete[:NAME] <name>
Returns list of defined sequence names.
Deletes all sequences from memory.
Deletes specified sequence from memory.
Alarm Limits
OUTPut:ALARm{1-2}:SEQuence?
Returns sequence associated with alarm.
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce <name>, <source> Assigns trigger source to sequence.
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce? <name> Returns trigger source currently selected.
Defining a Sequence
A sequence defines a series of SCPI commands with an associated name.
When the sequence is first defined, the commands are compiled and then
stored in a compressed format in non- volatile memory. The following SCPI
commands by L4400 LXI instrument are allowed in a sequence definition (all
other commands will generate an error).
L4421A / L4433A
ROUTe:ClOSe (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CLOSe:EXCLusive (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:OPEN (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:OPEN:ABUS [{1-4|ABUS1-ABUS4|ALL}]
ROUTe:OPEN:ALL [{1|ALL}]
ROUTe:MODule:WAIT {1|ALL}
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger[:IMMediate] <name>
SYSTem:DELay[:IMMediate] <time>
ABORt
L4437A
ROUTe:ClOSe (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CLOSe:EXCLusive (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:OPEN (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:OPEN:ALL [{1|ALL}]
ROUTe:MODule:WAIT {1|ALL}
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger[:IMMediate] <name>
SYSTem:DELay[:IMMediate] <time>
ABORt
90
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
L4445A
ROUTe:ClOSe (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:OPEN (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:MODule:WAIT {1|ALL}
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger[:IMMediate] <name>
SYSTem:DELay[:IMMediate] <time>
ABORt
L4450A
[SENSe:]TOTalize:CLEar:IMMediate (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:DATA[:{BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}] <data>,
(@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:DATA:BIT {0|1}, <bit>, (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger[:IMMediate] <name>
SYSTem:DELay[:IMMediate] <time>
ABORt
L4451A
SOURce:CURRent[:LEVel] {<current>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel] {<voltage>|MIN|MAX|DEF} , (@<ch_list>)
OUTPut[:STATe] {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger[:IMMediate] <name>
SOURce:FUNCtion:TRIGger:IMMediate (@<ch_list>)
SYSTem:DELay[:IMMediate] <time>
ABORt
L4452A
[SENSe:]TOTalize:CLEar:IMMediate (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:DATA[:{BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}] <data>,
(@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:DATA:BIT {0|1}, <bit>, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel] {<voltage>|MIN|MAX|DEF} , (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger[:IMMediate] <name>
SYSTem:DELay[:IMMediate] <time>
ABORt
L4400 User’s Guide
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
• When a sequence is defined, the specified commands are checked for
proper syntax and absolute parameter range limits. If an error is detected
during compilation, the entire sequence will be discarded. More extensive
error checking, such as channel range expansion and validation, is
performed when the sequence is executed.
• If you define a sequence with a name already in use by another sequence,
the new definition will overwrite the previous definition (no error is
generated).
• A sequence name can contain up to 30 characters. The first character
must be a letter (A- Z), but the remaining 29 characters can be letters,
numbers (0- 9), or an underscore ( _ ). Blank spaces are not allowed.
• When stored in memory, the user- defined sequence names are converted
to all uppercase letters. For example, when stored “MySeq_1” is converted
to “MYSEQ_1”.
• A sequence may invoke another sequence, but may not invoke itself
recursively. In addition, the number of invocations is limited to four levels
of nesting and this is enforced at the time of execution. Exceeding the
limit will abort the sequence and an error will be generated.
• At the time of sequence definition, a sequence may reference another
undefined sequence; however, at the time of execution an error will be
generated if an undefined sequence is invoked.
• Up to 500 unique sequences can be stored in non- volatile memory. Each
sequence is limited to 1024 bytes.
instrument prevents use of all channels in banks that contain one or
more channels in the specified scan list (these channels are dedicated
to
the scan). Therefore, if a sequence attempts to operate a channel in
a scanned bank, an error is generated and the entire sequence will
be discarded.
• If the command overlap function is enabled, all switching operations
within the sequence follow the overlapping rules. If the command overlap
function is disabled, all commands within the sequence are processed in a
serial fashion in the exact order in which they are received. Note, however,
that within a single command containing a <ch_list> parameter (e.g.,
ROUT:CLOSE (@1001:1010)), the order of the individual switch
operations is not guaranteed.
The following command defines a sequence named “MYSEQ_1”, which closes
several channels on the instrument and then opens a single channel.
ROUT:SEQ:DEF MYSEQ_1,"ROUT:CLOS (@1001:1009);OPEN (@1001)"
92
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
Querying the Sequence Definition
Once you have defined a sequence, you can query the definition to
review what SCPI commands have been assigned.
• The exact text specified in the original sequence definition is not
preserved when the sequence is compressed/stored in memory.
Therefore, the string returned may not be identical to the original
string, but it will be functionally equivalent. If the specified sequence
name is not currently stored in memory, an error is generated.
• The query command always returns the short form of the command
header in all upper-case letters (e.g., “ROUT:CLOS” is returned instead
of “ROUTE:CLOSE”). Channel numbers and channel range specifiers
are returned as they were specified.
The following command returns a string containing the SCPI commands
assigned to the specified sequence.
ROUT:SEQ:DEF? MYSEQ_1
The above command returns a string in the form (the quotes are
also returned):
":ROUT:CLOS (@1001:1009);:ROUT:OPEN (@1001)"
Executing a Sequence
After you have defined a valid sequence, you can execute it to process the
specified commands. If the specified sequence name is not currently stored
in memory, an error will be generated.
• If you attempt to trigger a sequence while one is already executing,
the trigger will be placed in a queue. When the trigger queue is full,
a “trigger ignored” error will be generated.
• To abort a sequence execution, use the ROUTe:SEQuence:ABORtcommand
or a Device Clear. When the sequence is terminated, the resultant
instrument state will be determined by how much of the sequence had
been executed when the ABORt/Device Clear was received. An ABORt
command (system abort) executed from within a sequence will not
terminate the sequence, but will abort a scan. The *RST and
SYSTem:PRESet commands will also abort a sequence execution prior to
performing their own actions.
• When a sequence is defined, the specified commands are checked for
proper syntax and absolute parameter range limits. If an error is detected
during compilation, the entire sequence will be discarded. More extensive
error checking, such as channel range expansion and validation, is
performed when the sequence is executed.
L4400 User’s Guide
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
• A sequence may invoke another sequence. but may not invoke itself
recursively. In addition, the number of invocations is limited to four levels
of nesting and this is enforced at the time of execution. Exceeding the
limit will abort the sequence and an error will be generated.
• You can also execute a sequence when an alarm condition is reached.
more information.
instrument prevents use of all channels in banks that contain one or
more channels in the specified scan list (these channels are dedicated
to
the scan). Therefore, if a sequence attempts to operate a channel in a
scanned bank, an error is generated and the entire sequence will
be discarded.
The following command executes a sequence named “MYSEQ_1”, which
closes several channels on the module and opens a single channel.
ROUT:SEQ:DEF MYSEQ_1,"ROUT:CLOS (@1001:1009);OPEN (@1011)"
ROUT:SEQ:TRIG MYSEQ_1
Executing a Sequence on an Alarm Condition
After you have defined a valid sequence, you can configure the instrument to
execute a sequence when a reading crosses an alarm limit on a channel. The
specified sequence will execute once when an alarm occurs on the specified
alarm. If the specified sequence name is not currently stored in memory, an
error will be generated.
• Assigning a sequence to an alarm will remove any other sequence's
association with that alarm, as well as that alarm’s association to any
other sequence.
• You can assign multiple channels to either of the two available alarms
(numbered 1 and 2). You cannot, however, assign alarms on a specific
channel to more than one alarm number.
• The sequence will execute once when an alarm occurs, after which the
trigger source will be automatically set to MANual. The sequence will not
execute again until the trigger source has been reassigned,
the alarm has been cleared, the association of the sequence to the alarm
has been re-established, and the alarm condition exists again.
To assign the sequence to a specific alarm number, use the following
command. Specify the MANual parameter to remove an association without
reassigning it to another alarm.
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce <name>,{ALARm1-ALARm2|MANual}
94
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
The following program segment selects the alarm source and configures the
instrument (L4450A) to execute the sequence named “TOTAL_1” when an
alarm (count of 50) is reported on Alarm 1. The Monitor mode is used to
evaluate alarm conditions on the selected channel.
ROUT:SEQ:DEF TOTAL_1,"SYST:DEL 1000"
CALC:LIM:UPP 10.25,(@1301)
CALC:LIM:UPP:STAT ON,(@1301)
OUTP:ALARM1:SOUR (@1301)
ROUT:MON:CHAN (@1301)
ROUT:MON:CHAN:ENAB ON, (@1301)
ROUT:SEQ:TRIG:SOUR TOTAL_1,ALAR1
ROUT:MON:STAT ON
INIT
Deleting Sequences
You can delete sequences to free up space in memory previously allocated for
the sequence.
• If you attempt to delete a sequence while it is executing, an error
will be generated. To abort a sequence execution, use the
ROUTe:SEQuence:ABORt command or a Device Clear.
• Deleting a sequence will remove its association with an alarm if used
more information).
The following command deletes the sequence named “TOTAL_1”.
ROUT:SEQ:DEL TOTAL_1
The following command deletes all sequences from memory.
ROUT:SEQ:DEL:ALL
Reading the List of Stored Sequences
You can read the names of all sequences currently stored in memory.
• When stored in memory, the user- defined sequence names are converted
to all uppercase letters. For example when stored, “Total_1” is converted
to “TOTAL_1”.
• Up to 500 unique sequences can be stored in non- volatile memory. Each
sequence is limited to 1024 bytes.
The following command returns a comma- separated list of sequence names
currently stored.
ROUT:SEQ:CAT?
The above command returns a string in the form:
L4400 User’s Guide
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
MYSEQ_1,PATH_DUT1,SW_PATH2
If no sequence names have been stored, a null string (“”) string
is returned.
Instrument State Storage
Usage:
• All L4400 Series Instruments
The L4400 series instruments have five storage locations in non-volatile
memory numbered 1 through 5 to store instrument states. A sixth location
stores the instrument’s power down state which is restored when the
instrument is turned back on. You can assign a user- defined name to each of
locations 1 through 5.
• You can store the instrument state in any of the four locations, but you can
only recall a state from a location that contains a previously
stored state.
• When shipped from the factory, storage locations 1 through 5 are empty.
In addition, the automatic recall mode is disabled
(MEMory:STATe:RECall:AUTO OFF command) and a Factory Reset (*RST
command) is issued when power is turned on.
• You can name a storage location, but the location is recalled using the
location number. The name can contain up to 12 characters. The first
character must be a letter (A- Z), but the remaining 11 characters can be
letters, numbers (0- 9), or the underscore character (“_”). Blank spaces are
not allowed.
• A Factory Reset (*RST command) does not affect the configurations
stored in memory. Once a state is stored, it remains until it is overwritten
or specifically deleted.
The following commands are used to store and recall instrument states.
*SAV {1|2|3|4|5}
*RCL {1|2|3|4|5}
To configure the instrument to automatically recall location 2 when power is
restored, send the following commands.
*SAV 2
MEM:STATE:RECALL:SELECT 2
MEM:STATE:RECALL:AUTO ON
96
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating and Programming
3
Error Conditions
Usage:
• All L4400 Series Instruments
When the L4400 instrument’s front panel ATTN LED is red, one or more
command syntax or hardware errors have been detected. A record of up to
20 errors can be stored in the instrument’s error queue.
For a complete listing of the error messages, see the Programmer’s
Reference Help file located on the Agilent L4400 Product Reference CD- ROM
that ships with the instrument.
• A special global error queue holds all power- on and hardware- related
errors (e.g., over- temperature, Safety Interlock, etc.).
• Errors are retrieved in first- in- first- out (FIFO) order. The first error
returned is the first error that was stored. Errors are cleared as you read
them. Once you have read all of the interface-specific errors, the errors in
the global queue are retrieved.
• Errors are cleared as you read them. When you have read all errors from
the interface- specific and global error queues, the ATTN annunciator
turns off.
• If more than 20 errors have occurred, the last error stored in the queue
(the most recent error) is replaced with -350,“Error queue overflow”.
No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue.
If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue, the instrument
responds with +0,“No error”.
• The interface- specific and global error queues are cleared by the *CLS
(Clear Status) command and when power is cycled. The errors are also
cleared when you read the error queue. The error queue is not cleared by
a Factory Reset (*RST command) or an Instrument Preset
(SYSTem:PRESet command).
The following command is used to read errors from the error queue. One
error is read per command.
SYSTem:ERRor?
L4400 User’s Guide
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Operating and Programming
Relay Cycle Count
Usage:
• L4421A 40- Channel Armature Multiplexer
• L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
• L4437A General Purpose Switch
• L4445A Microwave Switch/Attenuator
The number of relay cycles can be determined to help you predict relay
end- of- life. The instrument counts the cycles on each relay and stores the
total count in non-volatile memory.
• In addition to the channel relays, you can also query the count on the
Analog Bus relays and bank relays.
• You can reset the cycle count on any of the channel relays, Analog Bus
relays, or bank relays but the instrument must be unsecured. See Chapter
11 for information on unsecuring the instrument.
The following command is used to read the cycle count on the specified
instrument channel(s):
DIAG:RELAY:CYCLES? (@<ch_list>)
The following command is used to reset the cycle count on the specified
instrument channel(s):
DIAG:RELAY:CYCLES:CLEAR (@<ch_list>)
Calibration Overview
Usage:
• L4451A 4- Channel Isolated D/A Converter
• L4452A Multifunction Module
The L4400 series instruments requiring calibration are the L4451A and the
L4452A. Calibration procedures for these instruments are contained in
Chapter 11.
98
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
L4421A 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer
Low Frequency Multiplexer Switch Instrument
The L4421A low frequency multiplexer (MUX) switch module features two
banks of channels that provide broad multiplexing and measuring
capabilities. You can close more than one channel in each bank
simultaneously (N:1 configuration) on the multiplexer.
Safety Interlock The Analog Buses of the L4400 series
instruments are capable of carrying 300V signals. The L4421A
NOTE
instrument has a hardware Safety Interlock feature that
automatically opens the analog bus relays when the associated
interlock pins on the D-sub connectors (faceplate) lose continuity.
This prevents signals on the analog buses from being present on
the D-sub connector pins. Optional terminal blocks available from
Agilent automatically provide continuity for these interlock pins. If
cables are used, you must provide continuity for the interlock pins in
your DUT assembly. See the pinout information later in this chapter
for the location of interlock pins on each module.
The L4421A has analog bus relays on each of its two banks.
Therefore, the interlock pins are present on both the Bank 1 and
Bank 2 D-sub connectors on the module.
Normally, if you attempt to connect to the analog buses without
a terminal block or cable connected, an error is generated.
The SYSTem:ABUS:INTerlock:SIMulatecommand
allows you to temporarily disable errors generated by the Safety
Interlock feature and enables the simulation mode. Although Safety
Interlock errors are suppressed in this mode, the actual analog bus
relays affected by the Safety Interlock are disabled as long as no
terminal block or cable is connected to the module.
L4421A Measurement Functions
The L4421A supports the measurement functions shown in Table 4- 1.
Measurements are made by routing the signals on the multiplexer to a
separate digital multimeter (DMM) instrument using the L4421A analog bus.
100
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4421A 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer
4
Table 4-1. L4421A Supported Measurement Functions.
Notes
Function
Voltage, AC/DC
Current, AC/DC
direct current measurements are allowed on channels
41 through 44 only - external shunts are required for all
other channels
Frequency / Period
Ohms, 2-wire
Ohms, 4-wire
Thermocouple
Optional 34921 T Terminal Block is required for thermo-
couple measurements with built-in internal reference
junction
RTD, 2-wire
RTD, 4-wire
Thermistor
L4421A SCPI Command Summary
Table 4- 2 lists the instrument-specific SCPI commands that apply to the
L4421A 40- channel Armature Multiplexer. Table 3- 3 (Chapter 3) lists the
SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments.
For complete information on all SCPI commands, refer to the Programmer’s
Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD- ROM (p/n
34989- 13601).
Table 4-2. L4421A SCPI Command Summary.
Commands
Subsystem
ROUTe
(Scan Configuration)
ABORt
INITiate
ROUTe:CHANnel:ADVance:SOURce {EXTernal|BUS|IMMediate}
ROUTe:CHANnel:ADVance:SOURce?
ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay? (@<ch_list>)
L4400 User’s Guide
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
L4421A 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer
ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay:AUTO {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@ch_list)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay:AUTO? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:FWIRe {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:SCAN (@<scan_list>)
ROUTe:SCAN?
ROUTe:SCAN:ADD (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:SCAN:ORDered {OFF|0|ON|1}
ROUTe:SCAN:ORDered?
ROUTe:SCAN:REMove (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:SCAN:SIZE?
(Switch Control)
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel:CLEar:MODule 1
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel[:DEFine] "<label>" , (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel[:DEFine]? [{USER|FACTory},]
(@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CLOSe (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CLOSe? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CLOSe:EXCLusive (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:MODule:BUSY? 1
ROUTe:MODule:WAIT 1
ROUTe:MODule:WAIT? 1
ROUTe:OPEN (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:OPEN? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:OPEN:ABUS {1-4|ABUS1-ABUS4|ALL}
ROUTe:OPEN:ALL 1
ROUTe[:OPERation]:OVERlap[:ENABle] {OFF|0|ON|1}
ROUTe[:OPERation]:OVERlap[:ENABle]?
(Sequence
Operation)
ROUTe:SEQuence:ABORt
ROUTe:SEQuence:BUSY?
ROUTe:SEQuence:CATalog?
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine <name>, "<commands>"
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine? <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete:ALL
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete[:NAME] <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:RUNNing:NAME?
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger[:IMMediate] <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce <name>, MANual
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce? <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:WAIT
[SENSe]:TEMPerature:TRANsducer:TCouple:RJUNction[:INTer-
nal]?
SENSe
(Temperature
Sensing)
SYSTem:ABUS:INTerlock:SIMulate {OFF|0|ON|1}
SYSTem:ABUS:INTerlock:SIMulate?
SYSTem
102
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4421A 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer
4
TRIGger:COUNt {<count>|MIN|MAX|DEF|INFinity}
TRIGger
(Triggering
Commands)
TRIGger:COUNt? [{MIN|MAX}]
TRIGger:DELay:AUTO {OFF|0|ON|1}
TRIGger:DELay:AUTO?
TRIGger:SOURce {IMMediate|BUS|EXTernal|TIMer}
TRIGger:SOURce?
TRIGger:TIMer {<seconds>|MIN|MAX|DEF}
TRIGger:TIMer? [{MIN|MAX}]
DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes? (@<ch_list>)
DIAGnostic
DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes:CLEar (@<ch_list>)
L4421A Example Program Segments
The following sections contain example program segments of commonly used
instrument functions.
For detailed example programs involving multiple drivers and development
environments, refer to the L4400 Product Reference CD- ROM (p/n
34989- 13601).
Opening and Closing Channels
Example: Closing and opening channels This command closes the specified
channels on the L4421A. If any channel in a bank is defined to be part of the
scan list, and a scan is occurring, attempting to close another channel
(including Analog Bus channels) within the same bank will result in an error.
Channel closures in the other bank are allowed as long as no channels are
part of the scan list.
The following commands close and open channels 13 and 15 through 18.
ROUTe:CLOSe (@1013,1015:1018)
ROUTe:OPEN (@1013,1015:1018)
Example: Closing and opening Analog Bus relays The following command
connects the Analog Buses to Bank 1 (via the Analog Bus relays on Bank 1).
ROUTe:CLOSe (@1911,1912,1913,1914)
ROUTe:OPEN (@1911,1912,1913,1914)
The analog bus relays (numbered 1911, 1912, 1913, 1914) on the L4421A are
ignored if they are included in a range of channels. An error will be
generated if an analog bus relay is specified as the first or last channel in a
range of channels. For example, the following command closes all channels
between channels 1 and 30. In addition, this command closes analog bus
relay 1911.
ROUTe:CLOSe (@1001:1030,1911)
L4400 User’s Guide
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
L4421A 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer
Example: Querying channels for open or close state The following command
returns a 1 (true) or 0 (false) state of channel 036.
ROUTe:CLOSe (@1036)
ROUTe:CLOSe? (@1036) !Returns a 1
ROUTe:OPEN? (@1036) !Returns a 0
Example: Querying the Identity of the Instrument The following command
returns the identity of the L4421A:
SYSTem:CTYPe? 1
Querying and Clearing Cycle Count, and Resetting Modules
Example: Querying the cycle count for a relay The following command returns
the cycle count on channels 7 and 16.
DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes? (@1007,1016)
Example: Clearing the cycle count for a relay The following command resets
the cycle count to zero on the channels 7 and 16 for a MUX module in slot 1.
DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes:CLEar (@1007,1016)
Example: Resetting module(s) to power-on state The following command
resets the L4421A to its power- on state.
SYSTem:CPON 1
L4421A 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer Hardware Description
The L4421A 40- Channel Armature Multiplexer is divided into two banks with
20 latching armature switches (channels 1-20 and 21-40) in each. The
instrument also offers four additional fused relays (channels 41- 44) for
making AC and DC current measurements with no external shunts needed.
These current channels feature “make- before- break” connections to ensure
continuous current flow when switching from one current channel to
another. The current fuses are replaceable. Refer to the L4400 Service Guide
for specific information about these fuses.
This module also contains nine armature analog bus relays (channels
911- 914, 921- 924, and 931), four on each bank that can connect the bank
relays to the system analog buses and one that connects the current relays to
104
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4421A 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer
4
the current ( I ) and LO (L) terminals of ABus1. Through ABus1 and ABus2
you can connect any of the channels to a DMM for voltage or resistance
ABus1 consists of three wires that are used for current and voltage
NOTE
measurements. You cannot measure current and voltage on ABus1
simultaneously.
You can control each of the channel switches individually, and thus configure
the instrument in these modes:
• two independent 20-channel 2- wire MUXes. This configuration requires
neither using external wiring nor connecting through the internal Analog
Buses.
• one 20- channel 4-wire MUX. This configuration requires neither using
external wiring nor connecting through the internal Analog Buses.
For 4-wire resistance measurements, the instrument automatically pairs
channel n on Bank 1 with channel n+20 (Bank 2) to provide the source
and sense connections. Four- wire controls require execution of the
ROUTe:CHANnel:FWIRe command or scanning a channel previously
configured as 4- wire.
• one 40- channel 2- wire MUX. You must use external wiring or connect
through the internal analog bus relays for this configuration. For example,
closing analog bus channels 913 and 923 connects Bank 1 and Bank 2
through ABus3. Or, externally you can connect COM1 to COM2 to create
this configuration.
Low thermal offset voltage makes the L4421A ideal for low- level signal
switching. The 34921T optional terminal block provides a built- in
thermocouple reference junction that helps minimize errors due to thermal
offset when you measure thermocouples.
The L4421A has the capability to scan as many as 100 channels/second using
modern DMMs. With the automatic “break- before- make” connection
operation, you are assured that no two signals are connected to each other
during a scan. When using the module in a non-scanning mode, you can close
as many channels as you wish.
This module is safety interlock protected, which means whenever the D- sub
connector end of the instrument is exposed, the analog bus relays
automatically open and disconnect from the analog bus. For more
When power is off, all channel relays maintain state, and the analog bus
relays open.
L4400 User’s Guide
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
L4421A 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer
L4421A Simplified Schematic
This drawing shows the L4421A configured as two independent 20- channel
2- wire MUXes.
NOTE: The three-digit number assigned to each switch represents the channel number.
NOTE:
Bank 1
Bank Relays: Armature latching
Analog Bus Relays: Armature non-latching
H
H
H
H
011
012
016
017
018
019
020
001
002
006
007
L
L
L
L
003
004
005
008
009
010
013
014
015
COM 1
H
L
911
912
913
914
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
Analog Buses
ABus1
I
L
ABus2
DMM
DMM
(MEAS)
Current
ABus3
ABus4
Current
(SENS)
931
scanning
4-wire scanning
L
I
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
041
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
L
I
042
043
044
921
922
923
924
L
I
L
I
H
L
036
037
038
039
040
021
026
027
031
032
COM 2
022
023
024
025
028
029
030
033
034
H
H
H
H
035
L
L
L
L
Bank 2
106
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4421A 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer
4
L4421A D-Sub Connectors
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank 1
For orientation, the D-sub connector
end of the module is facing you.
COM COM
1H
7
1L
8
1H
1
1L 2H 2L
3H
5
3L
6
4H 4L 14H 14L 5H
5L 20H 20L Interlock1
*TSIL represents
2
3
4
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
50-Pin D-Sub
Temperature Sensor
Interface Line. This line
is used for temperature
interface only.
Male Connector
TSIL* 11H 11L 7H 7L 17H 17L 13H 13L 9H 9L 19H 19L 15H 15L Interlock 1
18
21
22
24
27
28
29
30
31
32
19
20
23
25
26
33
AMP AMP AMP AMP
GND 6H 6L 16H 16L 12H 12L 8H 8L 18H 18L 10H 10L 41L 41I 42L 42I
41
34
35
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
36
37
50
WARNING
As a safety
Description Pin
Description Pin
Description Pin
Description Pin
Description Pin
feature, interlock 1 pins
(17 and 33) on Bank 1
must be shorted to
1H
1L
2H
2L
3H
3L
4H
4L
5H
5L
1
6H
6L
35
36
21
22
41
42
27
28
45
46
11H
11L
12H
12L
13H
13L
14H
14L
15H
15L
19
20
39
40
25
26
11
12
31
32
16H
16L
17H
17L
18H
18L
19H
19L
20H
20L
37
38
23
24
43
44
29
30
15
16
COM1 H
COM1 L
7
8
2
enable the Bank 1 Analog
Bus relays to close. The
optional 34921T terminal
block shorts these pins
for you. This feature
protects inadvertent
routing of high voltages
from the Analog Bus to
the D-sub connector of
the module.
3
7H
7L
Interlock 1 17
Interlock 1 33
4
5
8H
8L
GND
34
18
47
48
49
50
6
TSIL*
9
9H
9L
AMP 41L
AMP 41I
AMP 42L
AMP 42I
10
13
14
10H
10L
Bank 2
COM COM
2H
2L
21H 21L 22H 22L 23H 23L
24H 24L 34H 34L 25H 25L 40H 40L Interlock 2
*TSIL represents
50-Pin D-Sub
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Male Connector
Temperature Sensor
Interface Line. This line
is used for temperature
interface only.
TSIL* 31H 31L 27H 27L 37H 37L 33H 33L 29H 29L 39H 39L 35H 35L Interlock 2
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
AMP AMP AMP AMP
43L 43I 44L 44I
GND 26H 26L 36H 36L 32H 32L 28H 28L 38H 38L 30H 30L
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
WARNING
As a safety
feature, interlock 2 pins
(17 and 33) on Bank 2
must be shorted to
Description Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description Pin
21H
21L
22H
22L
23H
23L
24H
24L
25H
25L
1
26H
26L
27H
27L
28H
28L
29H
29L
30H
30L
35
36
21
22
41
42
27
28
45
46
31H
31L
32H
32L
33H
33L
34H
34L
35H
35L
19
20
39
40
25
26
11
12
31
32
36H
36L
37H
37L
38H
38L
39H
39L
40H
40L
37
38
23
24
43
44
29
30
15
16
COM2 H
COM2 L
7
8
2
enable the Bank 2 Analog
Bus relays to close. The
optional 34921T terminal
block shorts these pins
for you. This feature
protects inadvertent
routing of high voltages
from the Analog Bus to
the D-sub connector of
the module.
3
Interlock 2 17
Interlock 2 33
4
5
GND
34
18
47
48
49
50
6
TSIL*
9
AMP 43L
AMP 43I
AMP 44L
AMP 44I
10
13
14
L4400 User’s Guide
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
L4421A 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer
34921T Terminal Block
This terminal block with screw- type connections is labeled with the model
number and the abbreviated module name.
All modules that connect to the analog bus are interlock protected.
NOTE
This means that when an installed module is exposed
(no terminal block or cable is connected), the analog bus relays are
further information.
The 34921T is the only terminal block that provides an isothermal
block with temperature reference for thermocouple measurements.
The temperature sensor is located on the bottom side of the PC board
as shown below. Also shown are two holes that you can use for connecting an
external temperature reference to the terminal block.
Temperature
Sensor
External
Reference
34921T (viewed from bottom side)
When wiring the terminal block via cables to the mainframe, make
CAUTION
sure the cables are connected to the correct connector. The cables
provide communication and power to the temperature sensor on
the 34921T terminal block. If cabling is not correct, an error may
occur indicating that the L4421A module is not fully operational.
108
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4421A 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer
4
Warning -the insulation of the wiring used
with the terminal block must be rated for
the highest voltage that will be present on
the terminal block or on the analog bus.
34921T Terminal Block.
L4400 User’s Guide
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
L4421A 40-Channel Armature Multiplexer
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
110
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
Matrix Switch Instrument
The L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix switch offers a convenient way for
you to connect multiple instruments to multiple points on your DUT. For a
lower cost and better specification alternative, you can connect both the
L4433A matrix instrument and the L4421A multiplexer instrument.
Although flexible, it is possible to connect more than one source at the same
time with the matrix. Make sure that dangerous or unwanted conditions are
not created by these connections.
The features of the L4433A include:
• Non- latching reed switches that can be configured for:
• differential (2- wire) mode, which has two (dual) matrices.
Each matrix is organized in a 4- row by 8- column configuration.
• single- ended (1- wire) mode, which has four (quad) matrices.
Each matrix is organized in a 4- row by 8- column configuration.
Safety Interlock The Analog Buses of the L4400 series
instruments are capable of carrying 300V signals. The L4433A
NOTE
instrument has a hardware Safety Interlock feature that
automatically opens the analog bus relays when the associated
interlock pins on the D-sub connectors (faceplate) lose continuity.
This prevents signals on the analog buses from being present on
the D-sub connector pins. Optional terminal blocks available from
Agilent automatically provide continuity for these interlock pins. If
cables are used, you must provide continuity for the interlock pins in
your DUT assembly. See the pinout information later in this chapter
for the location of interlock pins on each module.
The L4433A matrix instrument has analog bus relays on Bank 2
only. Therefore, the interlock pins are present on only the Bank 2
D-sub connectors.
Normally, if you attempt to connect to the analog buses without
a terminal block or cable connected, an error is generated.
The SYSTem:ABUS:INTerlock:SIMulatecommand
allows you to temporarily disable errors generated by the Safety
Interlock feature and enables the simulation mode. Although Safety
Interlock errors are suppressed in this mode, the actual analog bus
relays affected by the Safety Interlock are disabled as long as no
terminal block or cable is connected to the module.
112
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
5
L4433A SCPI Command Summary
Table 5-1 lists the instrument-specific SCPI commands that apply to the
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix. Table 3-3 (Chapter 3) lists the SCPI
commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments.
For complete information on all SCPI commands, refer to the Programmer’s
Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD-ROM (p/n
34989-13601).
Table 5-1. L4433A SCPI Command Summary
Commands
Subsystem
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel:CLEar:MODule 1
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel[:DEFine] "<label>" , (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel[:DEFine]? [{USER|FACTory},]
(@<ch_list>)
ROUTe
(Switch Control)
ROUTe:CLOSe (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CLOSe? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CLOSe:EXCLusive (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:MODule:BUSY? 1
ROUTe:MODule:WAIT 1
ROUTe:MODule:WAIT? 1
ROUTe:OPEN (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:OPEN? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:OPEN:ABUS {1-4|ABUS1-ABUS4|ALL}
ROUTe:OPEN:ALL 1
ROUTe[:OPERation]:OVERlap[:ENABle] {OFF|0|ON|1}
ROUTe[:OPERation]:OVERlap[:ENABle]?
ROUTe:SEQuence:ABORt
ROUTe:SEQuence:BUSY?
ROUTe:SEQuence:CATalog?
ROUTe
(Sequence
Operation)
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine <name>, "<commands>"
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine? <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete:ALL
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete[:NAME] <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:RUNNing:NAME?
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger[:IMMediate] <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce <name>, MANual
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce? <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:WAIT
SYSTem:MODule:WIRE:MODE {WIRE1|WIRE2}, 1
SYSTem:ABUS:INTerlock:SIMulate {OFF|0|ON|1}
SYSTem:ABUS:INTerlock:SIMulate?
SYSTem
DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes? (@<ch_list>)
DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes:CLEar (@<ch_list>)
DIAGnostic
L4400 User’s Guide
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
L4433A Example Program Segments
The following sections contain example program segments of commonly used
instrument functions. .
The channel addressing scheme used in these examples follow the general
form 1ccc where ccc is the three- digit channel number. The channel numbers
for the L4433A are derived as follows:
Two-wire mode: For two- wire mode, the channel numbers are derived from
the crosspoint or intersection of rows and columns, columns having two
digits. See the example below.
Displayed Channel Means This...
1304
An L4433A (2-wire mode) where the crosspoint is
row 3, column 4.
One-wire mode: For one- wire mode, the channel numbers are derived from
a specific matrix number and the crosspoint or intersection of rows and
columns on that matrix. See the example below.
Displayed Channel Means This...
1437
An L4433A in 1-wire mode with matrix 4 and the
crosspoint is row 3, column 7.
For information on specific configurations, refer to the simplified schematics
for the L4433A later in this chapter.
For detailed example programs involving multiple drivers and development
environments, refer to the L4400 Product Reference CD- ROM (p/n
34989- 13601).Setting 1- wire and 2- wire Modes
Example: Configuring the L4433A for 2-wire or 1-wire mode The following
command configures the L4433A for 1- wire measurements. If you are using
terminal blocks with the L4433A module, be sure to use the corresponding
2- wire or 1-wire terminal block.
SYSTem:MODule:WIRE:MODE WIRE1,1
After changing the (1-wire / 2-wire) mode on the L4433A, you must
cycle power on the L4433A for the new mode setting to take effect.
NOTE
114
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
5
Opening and Closing Channels
Example: Closing and opening matrix channels (two-wire mode) The following
commands close and open channels 311 and 312 through 315 of the L4433A
in 2-wire mode. The channel number represents the matrix crosspoint of a
row (one digit) and a column (two digits). For example, channel 311
represents crosspoint at row 3 and column 11.
ROUTe:CLOSe (@1311,1312:1315)
ROUTe:OPEN (@1311,1312:1315)
Example: Closing and opening matrix channels (L4433A in one-wire mode) The
following commands close and open channels 311 and 312 through 315 of the
L4433A in 1-wire mode. The channel number represents the matrix and the
matrix crosspoint of a row (one digit) and a column (one digit). For example,
channel 311 represents the crosspoint on matrix 3 at row 1, column 1 on the
L4433A in 1-wire mode.
ROUTe:CLOSe (@1311,1312:1315)
ROUTe:OPEN (@1311,1312:1315)
Although the previous two examples show the same channel
NOTE
numbers, the channels are derived differently as determined by a
derivation.
Example: Closing and opening Analog Bus relays The following command
connects the analog buses to Matrix 2 (2-wire mode).
ROUTe:CLOSe (@1921,1922,1923,1924)
ROUTe:OPEN (@1921,1922,1923,1924)
For 2-wire mode, only Matrix 2 connects to the the analog buses. In
NOTE
1-wire mode, only Matrix 3 and Matrix 4 connect to the analog
buses.
The analog bus relays (numbered 1921, 1922, 1923, 1924) on the L4433A are
ignored if they are included in a range of channels. An error will be
generated if an analog bus relay is specified as the first or last channel in a
range of channels. For example, the following command closes all valid
channels between channel 1504 and channel 1708. In addition, this command
closes Analog Bus relay 1921. Note that although the specified range of
channels includes the other Analog Bus relays, they are ignored and are not
closed by this command.
ROUTe:CLOSe (@1504:1708,1921)
L4400 User’s Guide
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
Example: Querying channels for open or close state The following command
returns a 1 (true) or 0 (false) state of channel 204.
ROUTe:CLOSe (@1204)
ROUTe:CLOSe? (@1204) !Returns a 1
ROUTe:OPEN? (@1204) !Returns a 0
Example: Querying the system for module Identify The following command
returns the identity of the L4433A:
SYSTem:CTYPe? 1
For the L4433A, the query response may include a suffix to indicate
NOTE
a 1-wire configuration. For example, the response for the L4433A
will be either "L4433A" (2-wire mode) or "L4433A-1W" (1-wire
mode).
Reading Cycle Count and Resetting the Power-On State
Example: Reading the cycle count for a relay The following command returns
the cycle count on channels 304 and 308.
DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes? (@1304,1308)
Example: Resetting the power-on state The following command sets the
L4433A to its power- on state.
SYSTem:CPON 1
Linking Multiple L4433A Instruments
You can link multiple L4433A instruments to form a larger matrix. The
following two drawings show two- module connections through rows and
columns.
You can connect rows in separate instruments using external wiring. Or,
using Bank 2 matrices, you can connect through the analog busses. For a
clear idea of how matrices are arranged and their connections to the analog
busses, see the simplified schematics later in this chapter. You must use
external wiring whenever you connect:
• rows in Matrix 1 of separate modules
• rows in Matrix 1 to rows in Matrix 2 on the same or separate modules
• columns of two matrices on the same or separate modules
116
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
5
Note that the presence of in- rush resistors on the analog busses and
columns require additional consideration, and you must take care when
1st L4433A
Increase number of rows by
connecting through
columns
1
2
3
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
n - 1
n*
n*
8 Rows
8 or 16 Columns
n - 1
1
2
3
4
2nd L4433A
*n can be 8 or 16
Increase number of
16 or 32 Columns
columns by connecting
through rows
1
2
3
n - 1 n*
1
2
3
n - 1 n*
1st L4433A
2nd L4433A
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Analog
Buses
*n can be 8 or 16
4 Rows
L4400 User’s Guide
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix Hardware Description
You can configure the L4433A dual/quad 4x8 reed matrix for 2- wire
(differential) mode or 1-wire (single- ended) mode.
The L4433A contains 100 Ω in- rush resistors that are used to protect the
reed relays from reactive loads. If you have applications where in- rush
resistors interfere with measurements, connections are provided on the
terminal blocks for you to bypass the in- rush resistors that are located
However, if you choose to bypass the in- rush resistors, the life of the
reed relays that you bypass may be degraded.
Two-Wire Mode
To physically configure the module for 2- wire mode, use the 34933T- 001
terminal block, or a compatible standard or custom cable. If using a
standard or custom cable, make sure you connect interlock pins 17 and
33 on the Matrix 2 D- sub connector. Refer to the pinout drawing and
In 2-wire mode, the L4433A module contains two matrices, each with 32
2- wire crosspoint non- latching reed relays organized in a 4- row by
8- column configuration. Every row and column are made up of two wires
each, a high (H) and a low (L). Each crosspoint relay has a unique
channel number representing the row and column that intersect to create
the crosspoint. For example, channel 308 represents the crosspoint
connection between row 3 and column 08 (all columns consisting of two
digits; in this case the digits are 08). See the simplified schematic on
You can connect any combination of inputs and outputs at the same
time. However, only Matrix 2 in 2- wire mode of this module connects to
the analog buses. By closing channels 921 and 922 you can connect rows
5 and 6 respectively to the HI (H) and LO (L) lines of ABus1 and ABus2.
In 2- wire mode, you can close no more than 20 channels simultaneously
due to power dissipation. However, note that analog bus relays count half
as much as channel relays in that total. For example, with one analog
bus relay closed, you can close up to a maximum of 19 channel relays. If
you try to close more than the allowed number of channels, you will
receive an error message.
118
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
5
One-Wire Mode
To physically configure the module in 1- wire mode, use the 34933T- 002
terminal block, or a compatible standard or custom cable. If using a
standard or custom cable, make sure you connect interlock pins 17 and
33 on the Matrix 2 D- sub connector. Refer to the pinout drawing and
In 1-wire mode, the L4433A module contains four matrices (1 through 4),
each with 32 1- wire crosspoint non- latching reed relays organized in a 4- row
by 8- column configuration. Every row and column has one wire each. Each
crosspoint relay has a unique channel number representing the matrix, and
the single- wire row and column that intersect to make the crosspoint. For
example, channel 218 represents Matrix 2, row 1 and column 8. See the
In 1-wire mode, you can close no more than 40 channels simultaneously due
to power dissipation. For example, with one analog bus relay closed you can
close up to a maximum of 39 channel relays. If you try to close more than the
allowed number of channels, you will receive an error message.
You can connect any combination of inputs and outputs at the same time.
However, only Matrix 3 and Matrix 4 in 1- wire mode of this module connect
to the analog buses. By closing channels 921 and 922 you can connect row 1
and row 2 respectively to the HI (H) and LO (L) lines of ABus1 and ABus2.
You can connect multiple matrix modules externally and/or through the
analog buses for applications that require large matrices. For information on
When the power is off, matrix relays and analog bus relays open.
L4400 User’s Guide
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
L4433A Simplified Schematic for Two-Wire Mode
NOTE:
Matrix Relays: Reed non-latching
Analog Bus relays: Armature
non-latching
Matrix 1
Col 1H
C1H
Col 1L
C1L
Col 2H
Col 2L
C2L
Col 8H
Col 8L
C8L
NOTE: Although columns are
numbered the same on Matrix
1 and Matrix 2, they are
electrically separate from one
another.
C2H
C8H
C1H bypass C1L bypass
C2H bypass C2L bypass
C8H bypass C8L bypass
H
H
H
L
L
L
H
L
NOTE: All series resistors
shown are 100Ω.
Row 1
Row 2
Row 3
Row 4
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
NOTE: Three-digit channel numbers are derived from the intersection of the
rows and columns, columns having two digits. The intersection shown here
represents Channel 308 (Row 3, Column 8).
L
Matrix 2
Col 1H
Col 1L
C1L
Col 2H
Col 2L
C2L
Col 8H
Col 8L
C8L
C1H
C2H
C8H
C1H bypass C1L bypass
C2H bypass C2L bypass
C8H bypass C8L bypass
Analog Buses
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
ABus1
DMM
(MEAS)
H
Row 5
Row 6
Row 7
Row 8
L
921
H
H
L
ABus2
DMM
(SENS)
L
922
923
924
H
L
H
L
ABus3
ABus4
H
L
H
L
120
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
5
Matrix 1
Matrix 2
L4433A D-Sub Connectors for Two-Wire Mode
For orientation, the D-sub connector
end of the module is facing you.
Matrix 1
NOTE:
•
In this diagram and the
table below, R represents
“row,” and C represents
“column.”
C4H
C4L
C5H
C5L
C7H
C7L
NC
11
NC
12
NC
17
C5H
7
C5L
8
C4H
1
C4L
2
R4H
5
R4L
6
C7H
13
C7L
14
bypass bypass
bypass bypass
bypass bypass
3
4
9
10
15
16
C3H
C3L
C1H
C1L
C6H
C6L
NC
18
NC
31
NC
32
C2H
23
C2L
24
R2H
27
R2L
28
C8H
29
C8L
30
GND
33
bypass bypass bypass bypass
bypass bypass
21 22
19
20
25 26
•
Bypass” means to
C2H
C2L
C8H
C8L
NC
34
NC
45
NC
46
R1H
49
R1L
50
C3H
35
C3L
36
C1H
37
C1L
38
R3H
39
R3L
40
C6H
41
C6L
42
bypass bypass
bypass bypass
bypass the 100Ω in-rush
resistor that protects the
reed relays.
43
44
47
48
50-Pin D-Sub Male Connector
Description Pin
Description Pin
Description Pin
Description Pin
C1H bypass 21
C1L bypass 22
C2H bypass 43
C2L bypass 44
C3H bypass 19
C3L bypass 20
Description Pin
C5H bypass
Description Pin
GND 33
R1H
R1L
R2H
R2L
R3H
R3L
R4H
R4L
49
50
27
28
39
40
5
C1H
C1L
C2H
C2L
C3H
C3L
C4H
C4L
37
38
23
24
35
36
1
C5H
C5L
C6H
C6L
C7H
C7L
C8H
C8L
7
9
8
C5L bypass 10
C6H bypass 25
C6L bypass 26
C7H bypass 15
C7L bypass 16
C8H bypass 47
C8L bypass 48
No Connect pins:
11-12, 17-18, 31-32,
34, and 45-46
41
42
13
14
29
30
C4H bypass
C4L bypass
3
4
6
2
Matrix 2
NOTE:
•
In this diagram and the
table below, R represents
“row,” and C represents
“column.”
“Bypass” means to
bypass the 100Ω in-rush
resistor that protects the
reed relays.
C4H
C4L
C5H
C5L
C7H
C7L
NC
11
NC
12
C5H
7
C5L
8
C4H
C4L
2
R8H
5
R8L
C7H
13
C7L
14
Interlock
17
bypass bypass
bypass bypass
bypass bypass
1
3
4
6
9
10
15
16
C3H
C3L
C1H
C1L
C6H
C6L
NC
18
NC
31
NC
32
C2H
23
C2L
24
R6H
27
R6L
28
C8H
29
C8L
30
Interlock
33
bypass bypass bypass bypass
bypass bypass
21 22
19
20
25 26
•
C2H
bypass bypass
C2L
C8H
C8L
bypass bypass
NC
34
NC
45
NC
46
R5H
49
R5L
50
C3H
35
C3L
36
C1H
37
C1L
38
R7H
39
R7L
40
C6H
41
C6L
42
43
44
47
48
50-Pin D-Sub Male Connector
Description Pin
Description Pin
Description Pin
Description Pin
Description Pin
WARNING
As a safety
R5H
R5L
R6H
R6L
R7H
R7L
R8H
R8L
C1H
C1L
49
50
27
28
39
40
5
C2H
C2L
C3H
C3L
C4H
C4L
C5H
C5L
C6H
C6L
23
24
35
36
1
C7H
C7L
C8H
C8L
13
14
29
30
C4H bypass
C4L bypass
C5H bypass
3
4
9
Interlock
Interlock
17
33
feature, interlock pins (17
and 33) must be shorted to
enable the analog bus
No Connect pins:
11-12, 18, 31-32, 34,
and 45-46
relays, which are on Matrix
2, to close. The optional
34933T-001 (for 2-wire)
terminal block shorts these
pins for you. This feature
protects inadvertent routing
of high voltages from the
analog bus to the D-sub
connector of the module.
C5L bypass 10
C6H bypass 25
C6L bypass 26
C7H bypass 15
C7L bypass 16
C8H bypass 47
C8L bypass 48
C1H bypass 21
C1L bypass 22
C2H bypass 43
C2L bypass 44
C3H bypass 19
C3L bypass 20
2
7
6
8
37
38
41
42
L4400 User’s Guide
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
34933T-001 Terminal Block for Two-Wire Mode
This terminal block with screw- type connections is labeled with the model
number and the abbreviated module name.
All modules that connect to the analog bus are interlock protected.
NOTE
This means that when an installed module is exposed (no terminal
block or cable is connected), the analog bus relays, which are on
Matrix 2, are open and disconnected from the analog buses. See
page 112 for further information.
If you are using an Agilent terminal block to connect your DUT to
this module be sure to use the 34933T-001 terminal block that
corresponds to the 2-wire configuration mode. Note that an error
will not be generated if you have installed a terminal block that
doesn't match the present module configuration.
NOTE
122
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
5
Warning -the insulation of the wiring used
with the terminal block must be rated for
the highest voltage that will be present on
the terminal block or on the analog bus.
Although columns are numbered the
same on Matrix 1 and Matrix 2, they are
electrically separate from one another
(e.g., Col C2).
COLUMN
When using the 34933T terminal block for 2-wire mode, access is provided to
the bypass columns through the columns labeled C9 through C16. Follow this
wiring convention shown in the table below for both matrices.
Terminal marked... Connects to...
Terminal marked... Connects to...
C9H
C1Hbypass
C1L bypass
C2H bypass
C2L bypass
C3H bypass
C3L bypass
C4H bypass
C4L bypass
C13H
C13L
C14H
C14L
C15H
C15L
C16H
C16L
C5H bypass
C5L bypass
C6H bypass
C6L bypass
C7H bypass
CC7L bypass
C8H bypass
C8L bypass
C9L
C10H
C10L
C11H
C11L
C12H
C12L
L4400 User’s Guide
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
L4433A Simplified Schematic for One-Wire Mode
NOTE: Although rows are numbered the same
across the matrices, they are electrically
separate from one another.
Matrix 1
NOTE:
1C1
1C2
1C8
1C1 bypass
1C2 bypass
1C8 bypass
Matrix Relays: Reed non-latching
Analog Bus Relays: Armature non-latching
NOTE: All series resistors shown are 100Ω.
Matrix 2
H
H
Row 1
Row 2
Row 3
Row 4
2C1
2C1 bypass
2C2
2C2L bypass
2C8
2C8 bypass
H
H
L
L
Row 1
Row 2
Row 3
Row 4
H
NOTE: Three-digit channel
numbers are derived from a
specific matrix number and the
intersection of rows and
L
L
H
L
columns on that matrix. The
channel shown here is 132
(Matrix 1, Row 3, Column 2.)
L
Matrix 3
Channel 218
(Matrix 2, Row 1, Column 8)
3C1
3C1 bypass
3C2
3C2 bypass
3C8
3C8 bypass
Analog Buses
H
H
Row 1
Row 2
Row 3
Row 4
Row 1
Row 1
H
L
ABus1
DMM
(MEAS)
H
H
921
922
Row 2
Row 2
H
L
ABus2
DMM
(SENS)
Matrix 4
4C1
4C2
4C2 bypass
4C8
4C8 bypass
4C1 bypass
Row 3
Row 3
H
L
ABus3
ABus4
923
924
L
L
Row 1
Row 2
Row 3
Row 4
Row 4
Row 4
H
L
L
L
124
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
5
L4433A D-Sub Connectors for One-Wire Mode
Matrices 1 & 2
Matrices 3 & 4
Matrices 1 and 2
For orientation, the D-sub connector
end of the module is facing you.
1C4
2C4
1C5
2C5
1C7
2C7
NC
11
NC
12
NC
17
1C5
7
2C5
8
1C4
1
2C4
2
1R4
5
2R4
6
1C7
13
2C7
14
bypass bypass
bypass bypass
bypass bypass
50-Pin D-Sub
Male Connector
3
4
9
10
15
16
1C3
2C3
1C1
2C1
1C6
2C6
NC
18
NC
31
NC
32
1C2
23
2C2
24
1R2
27
2R2
28
1C8
29
2C8
30
GND
33
bypass bypass bypass bypass
bypass bypass
21 22
19
20
25 26
1C2
2C2
1C8
2C8
NC
34
NC
45
NC
46
1R1
49
2R1
50
1C3
35
2C3
36
1C1
37
2C1
38
1R3
39
2R3
40
1C6
41
2C6
42
bypass bypass
bypass bypass
43
44
47
48
NOTE: Conventions for these
drawings and tables as they
relate to pinout information:
Description Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description Pin
1R1
1R2
1R3
1R4
2R1
2R2
2R3
2R4
1C1
2C1
49 1C2
27 2C2
39 1C3
23 1C7
24 2C7
35 1C8
36 2C8
13 1C4 bypass
14 2C4 bypass
29 1C5 bypass
3
4
9
GND
33
No connect pins:
11-12, 17-18,
31-32, 34, and
45-46
•
•
•
2R4 means Matrix 2, Row
4.
1C5 means Matrix 1,
Column 5
4C2 bypass means: Matrix
4, Column 2, and the
connection bypasses the
100Ω in-rush resistor that
protects the reed relays
5
2C3
30 2C5 bypass 10
50 1C4
28 2C4
40 1C5
1
2
7
8
1C1 bypass 21 1C6 bypass 25
2C1 bypass 22 2C6 bypass 26
1C2 bypass 43 1C7 bypass 15
2C2 bypass 44 2C7 bypass 16
6
2C5
37 1C6
38 2C6
41 1C3 bypass 19 1C8 bypass 47
42 2C3 bypass 20 2C8 bypass 48
Matrices 3 and 4
3C4
4C4
3C5
4C5
3C7
4C7
NC
11
NC
12
3C5
7
4C5
8
3C4
1
4C4
2
3R4
5
4R4
6
3C7
13
4C7
14
Interlock
17
bypass bypass
bypass bypass
bypass bypass
3
4
9
10
15
16
50-Pin D-Sub
Male Connector
3C3
4C3
3C1
4C1
3C6
4C6
NC
18
NC
31
NC
32
3C2
23
4C2
24
3R2
27
4R2
28
3C8
29
4C8
30
Interlock
33
bypass bypass bypass bypass
bypass bypass
21 22
19
20
25 26
3C2
4C2
3C8
4C8
NC
45
NC
46
3R1
49
4R1
50
NC
34
3C3
35
4C3
36
3C1
37
4C1
38
3R3
39
4R3
40
3C6
41
4C6
42
bypass bypass
bypass bypass
43
44
47
48
WARNING
As a safety
feature, interlock pins (17
Description Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description Pin
and 33) must be shorted to
enable the analog bus
relays, which are on Matrix
2, to close. The optional
34933T-002 (for 1-wire)
terminal block shorts these
pins for you. This safety
feature protects inadvertent
routing of high voltages
from the analog buses to the
D-sub connector of the
module.
3R1
3R2
3R3
3R4
4R1
4R2
4R3
4R4
3C1
4C1
49 3C2
27 4C2
39 3C3
23 3C7
24 4C7
35 3C8
36 4C8
13 3C4 bypass
14 4C4 bypass
29 3C5 bypass
3
4
9
Interlock
Interlock
17
33
No connect pins:
11-12, 18, 31-32, 34,
and 45-46
5
4C3
30 4C5 bypass 10
50 3C4
28 4C4
40 3C5
1
2
7
8
3C1 bypass 21 3C6 bypass 25
4C1 bypass 22 4C6 bypass 26
3C2 bypass 43 3C7 bypass 15
4C2 bypass 44 4C7 bypass 16
6
4C5
37 3C6
38 4C6
41 3C3 bypass 19 3C8 bypass 47
42 4C3 bypass 20 4C8 bypass 48
L4400 User’s Guide
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
L4433A Dual/Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix
34933T-002 Terminal Block for One-Wire Mode
This terminal block with screw- type connections is labeled with the model
number and the abbreviated module name.
All modules that connect to the analog bus are interlock protected.
NOTE
This means that when an installed module is exposed (no terminal
block or cable is connected), the analog bus relays and current
channels are open and disconnected from the analog buses. See
page 112 for further information.
If you are using an Agilent terminal block to connect your DUT to
this module be sure to use the 34933T-002 terminal block that
corresponds to the 1-wire configuration mode. Note that an error
will not be generated if you have installed a terminal block that
doesn't match the present module configuration.
NOTE
NOTE: Analog
Bus connections
are on Matrix 3
and Matrix 4.
Warning -the insulation of the wiring used
with the terminal block must be rated for
the highest voltage that will be present on
the terminal block or on the analog bus.
126
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
L4437A General Purpose Switch
General Purpose Switch Instrument
The L4437A General Purpose (GP) switch can be used to route signals or
control other system devices.
• The L4437A provides independent control of 32 latching relays:
• Twenty-eight Form C relays rated for 1 A at 60 W per channel
• Four Form A relays rated for 5 A at 150 W per channel.
The L4437A contains armature- latching relays, and you can use the switch
for device actuation, digital output, or combine it with additional switch
instruments to create flexible switching topologies. You can close multiple
channels at the same time. The L4437A does not implement an analog bus.
A temperature sensor on the instrument triggers system interrupts when
high- carry current- induced heat on the instrument is excessive. This
over- temperature situation generates an SRQ event when the factory-set 70
o
C threshold is reached. It is up to the user to determine what, if any, action
should be taken.
Reactive loads (those that include significant inductance or capacitance) can
cause voltage spikes or current spikes during switching operations. The
L4437A is designed for switching reactive loads. The optional 34937T
terminal block has solder pads for adding snubber circuits for the 5 A relays
locations of snubber circuit pads and installation information about a
snubber circuit.
A hardware jumper on the L4437A allows you to define the power- failure
states for the instrument’s 5 A latching relays. Depending on the position of
the jumper, the 5 A relays will either open or maintain state when system
power failure occurs. When shipped from the factory, the power- fail jumper
is in “MAINTAIN” position (all relays maintain their present state when
power fails).
Before changing the position of the jumper, turn off the instrument
WARNING
and remove all external connections. Wait five to ten seconds to
allow the instrument’s internal capacitors to discharge.
Remove the L4437A instrument sub- assembly from the instrument carrier
and then remove the sheet metal cover from the sub-assembly. Move the
position of the jumper mounted on the sub- assembly. See the figure below for
the jumper’s location.
128
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4437A General Purpose Switch
6
Do not connect the L4437A directly to a mains power outlet. If it is
necessary to switch a mains voltage or any circuit where a large
inductive load may be switched, you must add signal conditioning
elements to reduce the potential transients before they reach the
instrument.
WARNING
pen
O
U205
tain
Main
s
relay
mp
5A
01
U3
State
own
er D
Pow
01
C3
Figure 6-1. 5A Relay Power-Down State Jumper.
L4400 User’s Guide
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
L4437A General Purpose Switch
L4437A SCPI Command Summary
Table 6-1 lists the instrument-specific SCPI commands that apply to the
L4437A General Purpose Switch Instrument. Table 3-3 (Chapter 3) lists the
SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments.
For complete information on all SCPI commands, refer to the Programmer’s
Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD-ROM (p/n
34989-13601).
Table 6-1. L4437A SCPI Command Summary.
Commands
Subsystem
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel:CLEar:MODule 1
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel[:DEFine] "<label>" , (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel[:DEFine]? [{USER|FACTory},]
(@<ch_list>)"
ROUTe
(Switch Control)
ROUTe:CLOSe (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CLOSe? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CLOSe:EXCLusive (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:MODule:BUSY? 1
ROUTe:MODule:WAIT 1
ROUTe:MODule:WAIT? 1
ROUTe:OPEN (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:OPEN? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:OPEN:ALL 1
ROUTe[:OPERation]:OVERlap[:ENABle] {OFF|0|ON|1}
ROUTe[:OPERation]:OVERlap[:ENABle]?
ROUTe:SEQuence:ABORt
ROUTe:SEQuence:BUSY?
ROUTe:SEQuence:CATalog?
ROUTe
(Sequence
Operation)
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine <name>, "<commands>"
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine? <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete:ALL
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete[:NAME] <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:RUNNing:NAME?
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger[:IMMediate] <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce <name>, MANual
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce? <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:WAIT
DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes? (@<ch_list>)
DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes:CLEar (@<ch_list>)
DIAGnostic
SYSTem
SYSTem:MODule:PFAil:JUMPer:AMP5? 1
SYSTem:MODule:TEMPerature? [{TRANsducer|TTHReshold}], 1
130
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4437A General Purpose Switch
6
L4437A Example Program Segments
The following sections contain example program segments of commonly used
instrument functions.
The channel addressing scheme used in these segments follow the form 1ccc
where ccc is the channel number.
For detailed example programs involving multiple drivers and development
environments, refer to the L4400 Product Reference CD- ROM (p/n
34989- 13601).
Opening and Closing Channels
Example: Closing and opening channels The first two commands close
channel 3, then channel 5. The last command opens both channel 3 and
channel 5.
ROUTe:CLOSe (@1003)
ROUTe:CLOSe (@1005)
ROUTe:OPEN (@1003,1005)
Example: Querying channels for open or close state The following command
returns a 1 (true) or 0 (false) state of channel 016.
ROUTe:CLOSe (@1016)
ROUTe:CLOSe? (@1016) !Returns a 1
ROUTe:OPEN? (@1016) !Returns a 0
Reading Jumper State and System Identity
Example: Querying the power-failure state of 5 A relays The following
command returns the position of the power-fail jumper, either “MAIN” (all
relays maintain their present state when power fails) or “OPEN” (all relays
open when power fails). If this command is sent to a module other than the
L4437A, “NONE” is returned (no error is generated).
SYSTem:MODule:PFAil:JUMPer:AMP5? 1
Example: Querying the system for module identify The following command
returns the identify of the instrument.
SYSTem:CTYPe? 1
Reading Cycle Count and Resetting Modules to Power-On State
Example: Reading the cycle count for a relay The following command returns
the relay cycle count on channel 7 and channel 16.
DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes? (@1007,1016)
L4400 User’s Guide
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
L4437A General Purpose Switch
Example: Clearing the cycle count for a relay (all switch modules) Thefollowing
command resets the relay cycle count on channels 7 and 16.
DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes:CLEar (@1007,1016)
Example: Resetting the Instrument to its power-on state The following
command resets the instrument to its power- on state.
SYSTem:CPON 1
L4437A 32-Channel General Purpose Switch Hardware Description
The L4437A general-purpose switch provides independent control of:
• Twenty-eight Form C (DPST) latching relays rated at 1 A
• Four Form A (SPST) latching relays rated at 5 A. You can set the
A temperature sensor on these modules triggers system interrupts
NOTE
when high-carry current-induced heat on the modules reaches a
o
threshold of 70 C.
L4437A Simplified Schematic
NC
Channel 001
(1A Form C)
NO
NO
Channel 029
(5A Form A)
COM
COM
NC
NO
Channel 028
(1A Form C)
NO
Channel 032
(5A Form A)
COM
COM
132
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4437A General Purpose Switch
6
L4437A D-Sub Connectors
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank 1
For orientation, the D-sub connector end
of the module is facing you.
NC
4NO 1NO
29NO 29C 7NO 3NO 12NO 8NO
13NO 9NO 5NO 2NO 14NO 10NO 30NO 30C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
50-Pin D-Sub
Male Connector
Reserved 11C 7C 3C 12C 8C
4C 1C
13C 9C
5C
28
2C
29
14C 10C 6C GND
18
21
22
24
27
19
20
23
25
26
30
31
32
33
14NC 10NC 6NC 6NO
GND 11NO 11NC 7NC 3NC 12NC 8NC 4NC 1NC 13NC 9NC 5NC 2NC
34
38
41
43
44
45
47
48
49
35
39
40
42
46
36
37
50
Channel
Pin
Channel
Pin
Channel
Pin
37
Channel
Pins Channel
48 13 NC
Pins
1 NC
42
4 NC
41
7 NC
10 NC
43
30 NO
15
1 Common 25
4 Common 24
7 Common 20
10 Common 31
13 Common 26
30 Common 16
1 NO
2 NC
8
4 NO
5 NC
7
7 NO
8 NC
3
10 NO
11 NC
14
36
13 NO
14 NC
9
Reserved
GND
18
33
34
46
45
40
47
2 Common 29
5 Common 28
8 Common 23
11 Common 19
14 Common 30
GND
2 NO
3 NC
12
38
5 NO
6 NC
11
49
8 NO
9 NC
6
11 NO
12 NC
35
39
14 NO
29 NO
13
1
No Connect 17
44
3 Common 21
6 Common 32
9 Common 27
12 Common 22
12 NO
29 Common 2
3 NO
4
6 NO
50
9 NO
10
5
Bank 2
NC
17
31NO 31C 21NO
26NO 22NO
27NO 23NO
16NO 28NO 24NO 32NO 32C
17NO
4
15NO
8
19NO
11
18NO
7
50-Pin D-Sub
Male Connector
1
2
3
5
6
9
10
12
13
14
15
16
Reserved 25C 21C 17C 26C 22C 18C 15C 27C 23C 19C 16C 28C 24C 20C GND
18
21
22
24
27
28
19
20
23
25
26
29
30
31
32
33
24NC 20NC 20NO
GND 25NO 25NC 21NC 17NC 26NC 22NC 18NC 15NC 27NC 23NC 19NC 16NC 28NC
34
38
41
43
44
45
47
48
49
35
39
40
42
46
36
37
50
Channel
Pin
Channel
Pin
Channel
Pin
37
Channel
Pins Channel
48 27 NC
Pins
15 NC
42
18 NC
41
21 NC
24 NC
43
32 NO
15
15 Common 25
18 Common 24
21 Common 20
24 Common 31
27 Common 26
32 Common 16
15 NO
16 NC
8
18 NO
19 NC
7
21 NO
22 NC
3
24 NO
25 NC
14
36
27 NO
28 NC
9
Reserved
GND
18
33
34
46
45
40
47
16 Common 29
19 Common 28
22 Common 23
25 Common 19
28 Common 30
GND
16 NO
17 NC
12
38
19 NO
20 NC
11
49
22 NO
23 NC
6
25 NO
26 NC
35
39
28 NO
31 NO
13
1
No Connect 17
44
17 Common 21
20 Common 32
20 NO 50
23 Common 27
23 NO 10
26 Common 22
26 NO
31 Common 2
17 NO
4
5
L4400 User’s Guide
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
L4437A General Purpose Switch
34937T Terminal Block
This terminal block with screw- type connections is labeled with the model
number and the abbreviated module name.
Warning -the insulation of the wiring used
Pads for user-supplied snubber
circuity to alleviate reactive
transients. The circuits may
consist of resistors, capacitors,
varistors, or other elements as
needed to reduce the switching
voltage and current transients
inherent in reactive circuits.
with the terminal block must be rated for
the highest voltage that will be present on
the terminal block.
L4437A Terminal Block.
134
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
L4445A Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
L4445A SCPI Command Summary
Table 7-1 lists the instrument-specific SCPI commands that apply to the
L4445A Microwave Switch / Attenuator Driver Instrument. Table 3-3 (Chapter
3) lists the SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments.
For complete information on all SCPI commands, refer to the Programmer’s
Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD-ROM (p/n
34989-13601).
Table 7-1. L4445A SCPI Command Summary.
Commands
Subsystem
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:CLOSe:DEFault (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:CLOSe:DEFault? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:OPEN:DEFault (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:OPEN:DEFault? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PAIRed[:MODE] {OFF|0|ON|1},
(@<ch_list>)
ROUTe
(Switch Control)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PAIRed[:MODE]? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PULSe[:MODE] {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PULSe[:MODE]? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PULSe:WIDTh {<seconds>|MIN|MAX|DEF},
(@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PULSe:WIDTh? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:STATe? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIME:RECovery {<seconds>
|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIME:RECovery? [{MIN|MAX}, ]
(@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIME:SETTle {<seconds>|MIN|MAX|DEF},
(@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIME:SETTle? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel:CLEar:MODule 1
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel[:DEFine] "<label>" , (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel[:DEFine]? [<type>,] (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify[:ENABle] {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify[:ENABle]? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}, (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify:POLarity? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify:POSition:STATe? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CLOSe (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CLOSe? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:MODule:BUSY? 1
ROUTe:MODule:WAIT 1
ROUTe:MODule:WAIT? 1
136
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4445A Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
ROUTe:OPEN (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:OPEN? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:OPEN:ALL 1
ROUTe:OPERation:OVERlap[:ENABle] {OFF|0|ON|1}
ROUTe:OPERation:OVERlap[:ENABle]?
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:DRIVe[:MODE] {TTL|OCOLlector},
{1-4|BANK1-BANK4|ALL}, (@<rem_ch_list>)
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:DRIVe[:MODE]? {1-4|BANK1-BANK4},
(@<rem_ch_list>)
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:LED:DRIVe[:ENABle] {OFF|0|ON|1},
{1-4|BANK1-BANK4|ALL}, (@<rem_ch_list>)
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:LED:DRIVe[:ENABle]?
{1-4|BANK1-BANK4}, (@<rem_ch_list>)
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:LED:DRIVe:LEVel
{<amps>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, {1-4|BANK1-BANK4|ALL},
(@<rem_ch_list>)
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:LED:DRIVe:LEVel? {1-4|BANK1-BANK4},
(@<rem_ch_list>)
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:PRESet {1-4|BANK1-BANK4|ALL},
(@<rem_ch_list>)
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:LIMit {<max_drives>|MIN|MAX|DEF},
(@<rem_ch_list>)
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:LIMit? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<rem_ch_list>)
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce:BOOT {OFF|INTernal|
EXTernal}, (@<rem_ch_list>)
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce:BOOT? (@<rem_ch_list>)
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce[:IMMediate] {OFF|
INTernal|EXTernal}, (@<rem_ch_list>)
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce[:IMMediate]? (@<rem_ch_list>)
(Sequence
Operation)
ROUTe:SEQuence:ABORt
ROUTe:SEQuence:BUSY?
ROUTe:SEQuence:CATalog?
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine <name>, "<commands>"
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine? <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete:ALL
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete[:NAME] <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:RUNNing:NAME?
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger[:IMMediate] <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce <name>, MANual
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce? <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:WAIT
SYSTem:RMODule:RESet 1
SYSTem:RMODule:STATus? 1
SYSTem
L4400 User’s Guide
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
L4445A Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
The L4445A consists of a driver interface instrument (L4445A) and one or
more remote modules (34945EXT). The first remote module is electrically
attached to the driver instrument using a provided cable (equipped with 9-pin
D-Sub connectors). The first remote module attached to the driver instrument
is referred to as the master module. Additional remote modules are referred to
as slave modules.
Additional remote modules (34945EXT) are connected in a daisy- chain fashion
using RJ- 45 connectors and cables. A cable is provided with each module. Up
to eight remote modules can be controlled by a single L4445A.
Each remote module is divided into four banks for switch control.
Each bank has a connector for a distribution board. The distribution boards
provide an electrical connection between the user- supplied microwave
switches or attenuators and the remote module. A variety
of distribution boards are available that provide the most common connections
to Agilent microwave switches and attenuators. A screw terminal distribution
board is also available for other devices. A list of the available distribution
boards is shown on page 154. The microwave switches or attenuators and
the cables connecting them to the distribution boards are not supplied
with the L4445A.
The cables and the remote modules allow the microwave switches and
attenuators to be located closer to the device under test. This helps to keep the
signal transmission paths shorter and corresponding signal
losses lower.
Microwave switches and attenuators have larger power requirements than
other switch devices. The L4445A instrument is able to power 24 Volt switches
or attenuators on the first (master) remote module. Additional remote
modules (slaves) require an external power supply since no power is supplied
through the expansion bus cable. The first (master) remote module may use
either an external power supply or the L4445A to supply high power devices or
devices requiring drive voltages other than 24 Volt. Each remote module has
screw terminals for the external power supply connections.
138
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Figure 7-1 shows the components of the L4445A microwave switch/attenuator
driver configuration. The L4445A driver is shown connected to a single
34945EXT remote module.
9-pin D-SUB cable
(power to master 34945EXT)
L4445A Instrument Driver
Y1150A-Y1155A Distribution Board
34945EXT Extender
User-supplied switch
and cabling
Figure 7-1. L4445A Microwave Switch / Attenuator Driver Configuration.
• Each 34945EXT module can have up to four distribution boards installed.
You can have up to eight 34945EXT modules per L4445A.
• The L4445A driver interface can supply 24 V power to the first (master)
remote module only. The first remote module can also use an external
power source..
• Slave modules are connected in a daisy chain fashion using standard
ethernet RJ- 45 connectors and Cat 5 cables.
• All slave modules must obtain 24V power from an external power supply.
Each module can be powered by a separate supply.
• The Cat 5 Ethernet cable must be plugged- in to port 1 on the master remote
module. Port 1 and Port 2 are interchangeable on all slaves.
• All distribution boards on each remote module must use the same power
supply voltage.
L4400 User’s Guide
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Figure7-2 is a labeled drawing of the 34945EXT remote module.
Bank 1
Ch 1 - 8
Expansion Bus
Ch 11 - 18
Bank 2
Ch 21 - 28
Ch 31 - 38
Bank 3
Port 2
Port 1
Ch 41 - 48
Ch 51 - 58
Bank 4
Ch 61 - 68
Ch 71 - 78
External Power
Supply Connections
I/O Access LED
Figure 7-2. The 34945EXT Module.
Each 34945EXT has an I/O Access LED used to indicate transactions between
the L4445A and the 34945EXT module. When power is first applied to a
34945EXT module, this LED is continuously illuminated.
After the module has booted, the LED illuminates only intermittently during
programming operations.
Should the L4445A encounter problems communicating with the 34945EXT
the LED is continuously illuminated.
LED
Meaning
Not Illuminated
Power is not applied to the module or the
module is not processing commands.
Continuously
Illuminated
The 34945EXT is not booted, either due to
an internal error or an L4445A error.
Blinking
Intermittently
Normal operation during command
transactions. Send the
SYSTem:CTYPe:RMODule? query to
initiate a transfer and blink the LED.
Always tighten the screws securing the L4445A sub-assembly to the
instrument carrier assembly, and the screws on both ends of the D-Sub
cable. Incorrect grounding can cause malfunctions of the modules due to
electro-static discharge.
NOTE
140
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Recommended Switches and Attenuators
The recommended Agilent switches and attenuators for use with the L4445A
are shown below. Included in the table is the distribution board used for each
switch or attenuator.
Switch/Attenuator
Coil Voltage
Connection
Type
Drive Options
Distribution
Board
N1810UL/TL
N1811TL
N1812TL
Option 124
24 Vdc
Option 201
D-Sub 9-pin
female
Option 402
Position
Indicators
Y1150A
Y1151A
Y1151A
Y1151A
Y1152A
Y1152A
Y1152A
Y1153A
87104A/B/C
SP4T
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
STD
STD
16-pin Ribbon direct coil for
Cable Header
open drain
87106A/B/C
SP6T
STD
STD
16-pin Ribbon direct coil for
Cable Header
open drain
87406B
6 port matrix
STD
STD
16-pin Ribbon direct coil for
Cable Header
open drain
87204A/B/C
SP4T
STD
STD
16-pin Ribbon direct coil for
Cable Header
open drain
87206A/B/C
SP6T
STD
STD
16-pin Ribbon direct coil for
Cable Header
open drain
87606B
3 x 3, 2 x 4, or 1 x 5 matrix
STD
STD
16-pin Ribbon direct coil for
Cable Header
open drain
84904K/L M
84906K/L M
849807K/L M
Step Attenuators
Option 024
24 V
STD
10-pin Ribbon
Cable Header
8494G/H
8495G/H
8496G/H
Step Attenuators
Option 024
24 V
STD
12-pin Viking
Connector
Y1153A
Y1154A
Y1155A
87222C/D/E
Coaxial Transfer Switches
24 V
STD
STD
10-pin Ribbon direct coil for
Cable Header
open drain and
TTL compatible
8762A/B/C/F
8763A/B/C
8764A/B/C
Option 024
24 V
Solder Lugs
STD
direct coil for
open drain
L4400 User’s Guide
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Power Supplies
The switches and attenuators on the master remote module can be powered
from the L4445A or use an external power supply. All additional slave modules
must use an external power supply.
Each remote module has a terminal strip used to connect external switch
power. The three most common power supply voltages used by the microwave
switches and attenuators are:
• 5 Volts
• 15 Volts
• 24 Volts (most common)
EXTERNAL
PO
WER
30 VCD MAX
INPUT
+V
+V
GND
Power Consumption
Each 34945EXT can drive up to 2A continuously using an external power
supply. The actual amount of power available for the switches on each
34945EXT module varies with the type of switches being used and the settings
for those switches.
• Some switch types consume power even in their quiescent state.
Be sure to review the switch data sheets for the switches you are using.
• Set the pulse width to the minimum necessary to activate the switch using
the ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PULSe:WIDTh command.
• Add power supply recovery time using the
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIMe:RECovery command
• Use an external power supply if possible.
• When the drive source for the master remote module is set to internal, each
driver interface module may supply up to 2A.
142
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Channel Numbering
The L4445A uses the following channel numbering scheme:
1<rem><channel>
where:
rem is the remote module being controlled, and is a single digit in the range
of 1 to 8.
channel is the channel number on the remote module.
The channel number is two digits spanning channels across each remote
module. Channel numbers are shown below (also see the figure on
page 140).
Bank
Channels
1 to 8
Channels
11 to 18
31 to 38
51 to 58
71 to 78
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank 3
Bank 4
21 to 28
41 to 48
61 to 68
The channel numbers are arranged to facilitate the pairing of channels for
dual coil switches and attenuators. Dual coil devices require the use of two
channels, one for each coil. By pairing the upper and lower channels in each
bank, the devices can be controlled using only the lower channel number. For
example, when a paired- coil device is installed on bank 2, channels 21 and 31
are paired and are controlled using only channel 21.
The following SCPI command closes channel 5 on the master remote module
connected to the L4445A.
ROUT:CLOS (@1105)
You can also use a range of channel numbers. You could close all the channels
on the master remote module connected to a L4445A by sending the following
command.
ROUT:CLOS (@1101:1178)
Note that when single- coil devices are used, the channel numbering is not
consecutive across all 16 channels in a bank.
L4400 User’s Guide
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Simple Switch Control
All examples in this chapter make reference to SCPI commands for switch
control. The L4445A commands are summarized in Table 7-1. For more
information, refer to the Programmer’s Reference help file included on the
Product Reference CD- ROM (p/n 34989- 13601).
The switches and attenuators are designed to respond to the SCPI
ROUTe:CLOSe and ROUTe:OPEN commands. For example, to open and close a
switch attached to channel 1 on bank 1 of the second remote module attached
to the L4445A, you could use the following commands (rem = 2, channel = 01).
ROUT:OPEN (@1201)
ROUT:CLOS (@1201)
Before you can close or open a switch, however, several other parameters must
be configured. Each distribution board has a set of factory default parameters
designed to support the type of switches intended to be present. These
current source must be selected and configured.
The following commands show a simple sequence controlling channel 1 of an
Agilent N1810 switch (installed on a Y1150A distribution board) of the third
remote module attached to a L4445A (rem = 3, channel = 01). Note that ALL
34945EXT modules are reset by the first command shown.
SYST:RMOD:RES 1
ROUT:RMOD:BANK:PRESET BANK1,(@1300)
ROUT:CHAN:DRIV:CLOS:DEF (@1301)
ROUT:RMOD:DRIV:SOUR INT,(@1300)
ROUT:OPEN (@1301)
<-- other commands -->
ROUT:CLOS (@1301)
In the example above, the SYSTem:RMODule:RESet command resets the
module and disables all drive currents. The next command loads the factory
default settings for the distribution board (Y1150A) used to support the
Agilent N1810 switch. The default state of switch closed is then configured.
When the drive source is set to internal (third remote module only), the switch
assumes its default closed state. The configured switch may now be controlled
using the ROUTe:OPEN and ROUTe:CLOSe commands.
You must turn off the channel drive before sending the
NOTE
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:PRESetcommand. Once configured, turn the
channel drive back on
(ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce:IMMediate).
These commands and settings are described in more detail later in this
chapter and in the Programmer’s Reference Help file.
144
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Remote Module Identifiers
A special channel numbering method exists for use with SCPI commands that
operate one or more banks of the remote module. This addressing uses a
non- existent channel number (00) to indicate the commands are useful for all
channel in a bank or all channels on a remote module. The format of this
special channel list is specified as:
1<rem><00>
where:
rem is the remote module being controlled, and is a single digit in the range
of 1 to 8.
channel is non- existent channel number 00 on the remote module.
You may not use this special channel list in a range of channels.
The following commands use this form of channel addressing. Refer to the
Programmer’s Reference Help file for more details.
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:DRIVe:MODE
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:LED:DRIVe:ENABle
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:LED:DRIVe:LEVel
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:PREset
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:LIMit
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce:BOOT
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce:IMMediate
Drive Modes
Each remote module can drive the switches and attenuators using either TTL
or open collector drive methods. The TTL drive mode uses a pull- down resistor
on the output and drives a TTL high level when asserted. The open collector
drive provides a current path to ground when asserted.
H
TTL Drive
L
Drive Active
H
Open Collector
Drive
L
The drive mode is set on a per bank basis using the
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:DRIVe:MODE command.
L4400 User’s Guide
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Using Single Drive Switches and Attenuators
Some microwave switches require a single drive. With single drive devices the
channel numbering is not consecutive across all channels in a bank (refer to
The L4445A can provide single drive devices with either pulsed or continuous
drive current. Settings and parameters for continuous drive mode are given in
the next section.
Continuous Drive Current
Driving non-latching devices requires a power supply capable of handling
sustained high current requirements. You may only use continuous drive
current with channel configured for single drive. Additionally, to prevent
power supply loading, care must be taken when operating more than one
continuous drive at a time. The actual drive may be configured as either TTL or
open- collector operation.
Using Continuous Drive
The diagram below illustrates the continuous drive signals for two channels
(switches) and the relationship of the drive parameters to the power supply
requirements.
T(Setttle)
T(Recovery)
Drive Ch 1
Drive Ch2
Channel 1 Position
Indicators Evaluated
Start Drive
Channel 2
Start Drive
Channel 1
As shown in the diagram, the drive signal is initially applied to channel 1.
Drive is applied to channel 2 only after a power supply recovery period has
elapsed T(Recovery). The power supply recovery time is set using the the
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIMe:RECoverycommand. This parameter may be set
individually for each channel or will default to 0.0 ms following either a
SYSTem:RMODule:RESet or ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:PRESet command.
specify a T(Settle) parameter. This parameter ensures the switch has had
time to change state before the position indicator is evaluated. This
parameter may be set individually for each channel or will default to 0.0
ms following either a SYSTem:RMODule:PRESet or
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:PRESet command.
146
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Using Dual Drive Switches and Attenuators
Many microwaveswitches and attenuators have a paired drive input. Typically,
one drive is electrically connected to the lower channel number in a bank and
one connected to a corresponding upper channel number. For example, a dual
drive switch should have its ‘State A’ coil connected to channel 21 and its
‘State B’ coil connected to channel 31 on bank two.
The L4445A drives dual drive devices in pulsed mode only. Pairing two
channels automatically configures the channels to pulsed mode (you must
explicitly un- pair the channels before continuous drive mode can be
re- enabled). Settings and parameters for pulsed drive mode are given on
Pairing Channels
With dual drive devices the channels in each bank may be paired (refer to the
be ‘State A’ and one drive ‘State B’ on a switch. Pairing channels allows
settings and control to be shared between the two drives. To pair channels
use the ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PAIRed:MODE command. When paired, the
lower and upper channel number on a bank are combined. For example,
the following command pairs channel 1 and channel 11 on bank 1.
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PAIRed:MODE ON, (@1101)
You may also pair all channels in a bank by specifying a range of channels:
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PAIRed:MODE ON, (@1101:1108)
Typically, pairing is performed using the lower channel numbers in the bank.
You may set channel parameters using either the lower or upper channel
number. The settings will apply to both channels in the pair.
You must have the channel drive turned off before attempting to pair channels.
Channel drive is turned off by sending the
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce OFF command.
Once a channel is paired, only pulse drive is allowed on that channel.
Setting any of the following parameters applies the setting to both of the
paired channels:
• ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PULSe:WIDTh
• ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIMe:RECovery
• ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIMe:SETTle
• ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify:ENABle
L4400 User’s Guide
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Using Pulse Drive
To use the pulse drive mode, send the
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PULSe:MODE ON command or pair two channels
with the ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PAIRed:MODE command. The diagram
below illustrates the pulse drive for two channels (switches) and the
relationship of the drive parameters to the power supply requirements.
T(Setttle)
T(Recovery)
T(Pulse)
Drive Ch 1
Drive Ch2
Start Drive
Channel 1
Channel 1 Position
Indicators Evaluated
Start Drive
Channel 2
As shown in the diagram, the drive is applied to channel 1 and held for the
T(Pulse) time set using the ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PULSe:WIDTh command.
Drive is applied to channel 2 only after a power supply recovery period has
elapsed T(Recovery). The power supply recovery time is set using the
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIMe:RECoverycommand. This parameter may be set
individually for each channel or will default to 0.0 ms following either a
SYSTem:RMODule:RESet or ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:PRESet command.
specify a T(Settle) parameter. During T(Settle) the switch is considered
‘busy’. This parameter ensures the switch has had time to change state
before the verification. This parameter may be set individually for each
channel or will default to 0.0 ms following either a SYSTem:RMODule:RESet
or ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:PRESet command.
Unlike other switch modules, the L4445A will always pulse a channel in
response to a ROUTe:OPEN or ROUTe:CLOSe command. For example, sending
ROUTe:CLOSe to a channel three times in a row will result in three output
pulses.
A single drive channel operating in pulse mode with channel verification
NOTE
and the ROUTe:CLOSe?query will return an error. Single drive pulsed
channels must have verification enabled
(ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify ON) to query the channel state using the
ROUTe:CLOSe?query.
148
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Long Execution Times
When configuring long channel pulse drive times and/or power supply
recovery times, be aware that the results may be long execution times. For
example, you can set a channel pulse width of 255 ms and a recovery time of
255 ms. This channel will require 510 ms to open or close. If you set such
parameters across all the channels on a remote module then the execution
time will be over 30 seconds.
Be aware, all channel states are driven when the remote module is reset. So,
this lengthy execution can occur following a power on, *RST, SYSTem:CPON,
SYSTem:PRESet, or ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce command.
Verifying Switch State
Many switches and attenuators have a built- in switch position indicator. This
indicator can be used to drive LED position indicators (some position
L4445A checks the position indicators against the SCPI command last sent
to provide verification of switch states.
By default, verification is disabled and the switch state is assumed to be the
last open/close state driven. Verification is enabled using the
ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify:ENABle command. Enabling verification can cause
multiple errors to be generated if the system is incorrectly configured.
If a switch operation appears to have failed, an error is generated at the time
the ROUTe:CLOSe or ROUTe:OPEN command is executed. If you send a
ROUTe:CLOSe or ROUTe:OPEN command with a channel list (i.e., multiple
channels), the verification is performed after all open/close operations have
been completed. An error is generated for each channel operation that did not
properly verify.
The verification process will affect the operation of the ROUTe:CLOSe? and
ROUTe:OPEN?commands. If verification is enabled, these commands will check
the actual hardware state of the specified channels, rather than just reporting
the presumed state.
When verification is enabled and a remote module is reset, a series of errors
will be consolidated and reported as one error.
Verification will slow switching performance on any remote module with one
or more verified channels. Additionally, if you have enabled the command
overlap function (using the ROUTe:OPERation:OVERlap:ENABle command),
the verification will be performed at the end of each close/open operation,
before processing the next command.
The state of all verified channels on a remote module is refreshed whenever
any channel on that remote module is operated. This helps to ensure the front
panel and web based interface have a valid state.
L4400 User’s Guide
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Switch state is stored in the instrument. In contrast, the ROUTe:OPEN? and
ROUTe:CLOSequeries always check the actual hardware state of the switch for
verified channels.
For paired operations on the L4445A (using the
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PAIRed:MODE command), when you enable
verification on either paired channel verification will be enabled on both
channels. In addition, the module checks for complementary position
indicators on the lower and upper channels of the pair (i.e., the position
indicators should indicate opposite states). If the state of the lower and upper
position indicators are found to be in the same state (due to a hardware issue),
an error is generated and the state of the lower channel is assumed.
When the paired mode is disabled and pulsed mode is enabled, you cannot
query the open/closed state of the associated channels unless verification is
enabled. While in this mode (single drive operation), only “close” operations
are allowed on the channels (“open” operations are not allowed). In this mode,
a close operation provides a single pulse on the specified channel.
If you enable verification on a non-paired (single drive), non-pulsed
(continuous drive) channel on the L4445A, the ROUTe:CLOSe? and
ROUTe:OPEN?commands return the state of the verified device, rather than the
drive state of the specified channel. It is possible to have such a channel being
driven via a ROUTe:CLOSecommand by the channel position indicators show
the channel as open. In these cases, use the
ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify:POSition:STATe? command to determine exactly
which channels are currently being driven.
The ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify:POLaritycommand sets the logic polarity of the
verification lines on specific channels. You can specify the polarity as NORMal
(active high) or INVerted (active low).
If you have not enabled verification, you can still query the indicator state of a
specific channel using the ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify:POSition:STATe?
command. This command is useful for channels on which verification is
disabled for activities such as debugging or when verification is disabled for
performance reasons.
150
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
LED Drive
The distribution boards contain a ribbon cable header you can use to connect
LEDs to provide a visual indication of switch state. These lines reflect the state
of their corresponding channel’s position indicator. Some systems use LEDs as
a graphical indicator of switch positions.
Use the ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:LED:DRIVe:LEVel command to set the drive
current for the LEDs. You do not need to provide an external current
limiting resistor. This command uses special channel addressing as
Once the drive current is set, enable the LED drives using the
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:LED:DRIVe:ENABle command. This command uses
The LEDs obtain their power from the remote module power supply. If the
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce OFFcommand has been sent, the
NOTE
LEDs will not operate.
Simplified connections for the position indicators are shown in the diagrams
L4400 User’s Guide
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Default and Reset States
The L4445A allows several types of reset and default actions. Most resets rely
on states stored in non- volatile memory on the remote modules. Default
parameters can be set to ensure the system always returns to a safe state.
SYSTem:RMODule:RESet
This command is the only command that will reset all remote modules
connected to the L4445A to the factory defaults. No determination of the
distribution boards present is made. The system is set to the following
conditions after executing this command.
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce:IMMediate
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce:BOOT
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:LIMit
OFF
OFF
1
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:DRIVe:MODE
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:LED:DRIVe:ENABle
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:LED:DRIVe:LEVel
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PAIRed:MODE
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PULSe:MODE
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PULSe:WIDTh
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIME:RECovery
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIME:SETTle
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:OPEN:DEFault
ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify:ENABle
OCOLlector
ON
5 mA
OFF
ON
15 ms
0.0 seconds
0.0 seconds
OPEN selected
OFF
ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify:POLarity
NORMal
152
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
SYSTem:PRESet, *RST, SYSTem:CPON and Power On
These actions drive the channels to their defined DEFault state (using the
configuration stored on the remote module) and force the system to recognize
new topologies (caused by power or connectivity changes). These actions set
controllable to ensure safety of operation in the system; the default state
for channel closure and the default state for drive enabled.
The default channel state (open or closed) for each channel can be set using
either of the following commands.
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:CLOSe:DEFault
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:OPEN:DEFault
If a channel is configured for a single drive in pulsed mode, OPEN
NOTE
operations are undefined. When these channels are configured to a
default state of OPEN, no action is taken on these channels.
The drive state can be set as a default using the
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce:BOOT command. This command allows you to
specify whether the drive current, when present, should be applied to the
switches or not. You can set OFF, INTernal, and EXTernal for the default.
The *RST command forces a re-evaluation of all connected remote modules,
followed by setting all channels to their default states. This is very similar in
operation to what occurs at power- up.
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:PRESet
This command sets a bank to default values that vary according to which
distribution board is attached. The following table shows the default states set
by ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:PRESet.
Y1150A
ON
Y1151A
Y1152A
ON
Y1153A
ON
Y1154A
ON
Y1155A
ON
ROUT:CHAN:DRIV:PULS:MODE
ROUT:CHAN:DRIV:PULS:WIDT
ROUT:CHAN:PAIR:MODE
ON
15 ms
ON
15 ms
OFF
15 ms
ON
15 ms
ON
15 ms
ON
15 ms
OFF
ROUT:CHAN:DRIV:TIME:REC
ROUT:CHAN:DRIV:TIME:SETT
ROUT:CHAN:VER:ENAB
0 s
0 s
0 s
0 s
0 s
0 s
0 s
0 s
0 s
0 s
0 s
0 s
OFF
OFF
OFF
INV
OCOL
ON
OFF
INV
OCOL
ON
OFF
OFF
ROUT:CHAN:VER:POL
NORM
OCOL
ON
NORM
OCOL
ON
NORM
OCOL
ON
NORM
OCOL
ON
ROUT:RMOD:BANK:DRIV:MODE
ROUT:RMOD:BANK:LED:DRIV
L4400 User’s Guide
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
ROUT:RMOD:BANK:LED:LEV
0.005 A
OFF
0.005 A
0.005 A
ON
0.005 A
OFF
0.005 A
OFF
0.005 A
OFF
ROUT:CHAN:DRIV:CLOS:DEF
OFF (except
channel 7, 17)
ROUT:CHAN:DRIV:OPEN:DEF
ON
ON (except
OFF
ON
ON
ON
channel 7, 17)
This command uses special channel addressing as described in “Remote
This command requires the channel drive source be in order to allow
execution (ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce OFF).
Distribution Boards
Each 34945EXT remote module can hold up to four distribution boards.
Distribution boards are designed to support the most common types of Agilent
microwave switches and attenuators. The table below shows the distribution
boards available and lists the supported switches and attenuators.
Y1150A
Y1151A
Y1152A
Y1153A
Y1154A
Y1155A
Distribution board for up to eight N181x SPDT switches
(9-pin Dsub connectors)
Distribution board for two 87104x/106x multiport or
87406B matrix switches
Distribution board for a single 87204x/206x or
87606B switches and two N181x SPDTswitches
Distribution board for two 84904/5/8x or
8494/5/6 step attenuators
Distribution board for two 87222 transfer switches and
up to six N181x SPDT switches
Distribution board with screw terminals for up to 16 switch drives
Specific information for each distribution board and the supported switch
types is given in the following sections.
Distribution boards are specialized terminal boards and hold no active
electronic components. The distribution boards can be identified by the system
(refer to the SYSTem:CTYPe:RMODule? and SYSTem:CDEScription:RMODule?
commands description in the Programmers Reference Help file).
Channel drive attributes for each distribution board will be set to the values
154
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Y1150A
The Y1150A supports the Agilent N181x series microwave switches shown
below. Up to eight switches in any combination can be connected to each
distribution board.
Agilent Switch
N1810UL
Description
Unterminated latching 3-port (SPDT)
Terminated latching 3-port (SPDT)
Terminated latching 4-port (transfer)
Unterminated latching 5-port
N1810TL
N1811TL
N1812UL
Y1150A Switch Options Supported
(Recommended options are shaded).
Option Name
Option Number
Description and Comments
Frequency Range various
All options supported
Coil Voltage
105
+5VDC
Highest coil current requirement of all coil voltage
options. May limit system speed because current
capacity limitations. This option draws 600 mA
(except N1810UL 300 mA). Therefore, a maximum of 3 (6)
devices may be switched simultaneously.
115
124
201
+15VDC
+24VDC (required if using internal power)
D-Sub 9 pin female
DC Connector
Type
202
Solder lugs
Can use ribbon cables with the Y1150A, or discrete wires
with the Y1155A.
RF Performance
Drive Options
various
401
All options supported
TTL/CMOS compatible
All switches on the same distribution board must use the
same drive mode.
402
403
Position indicators (required to use verification feature)
Current interrupts
For pulsed operation, current interrupts are not required.
May provide system switching speed improvements.
L4400 User’s Guide
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Y1150A Connections
LED Connectors
Switch
Connectors
Y1150A Switch Connectors SW1 Through SW8
2
1
10
9
Pin
1
Use
Pin
Use
GND
2
4
IND B
+VI
3
N.C.
5
Drive B
Drive A
+VR
6
IND A
+VI
7
8
9
10
N.C.
+VR is the Voltage source for the Relay
+VI is the Voltage source for the LED Indicator
Switch Connector
Pin 1
Distribution Board Connector
No Connection
To This Pin
156
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Example Part Numbers
7
Item
Description
Cable Type
9 conductor ribbon cable, 0.050"pitch, 26 or 28 3M 3801/09 (26 AWG)
*
AWG stranded
3M 3365/09 (28 AWG)
Y1150A Connector
Switch Connector
Cable Wiring
10 pin socket connector, 0.1" x 0.1" pin grid,
IDC termination, center polarizing key
3M P/N 89110-0101
AMP P/N 76288-1
9 pin D-sub male, IDC termination, without
threaded insert
3M P/N 8209-6000
AMP P/N 747306-4
Y1150A socket connector pin 1 to switch
D-sub connector pin 1
(Note: pin 10 of Y1150A connector not used)
*
26 AWG recommended for 5V coil switches
Y1150A Switch Control
All switches are driven in PAIRed mode
State A
State B
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
ROUT:OPEN (@xx01)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx02)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx03)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx04)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx05)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx06)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx07)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx08)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx01)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx02)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx03)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx04)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx05)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx06)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx07)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx08)
L4400 User’s Guide
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Y1150A LED Connectors LED1 and LED2
2
1
16
15
LED1 Connector
LED2 Connector
Pin
1
Use
Pin
2
Use
Pin
1
Use
Pin
2
Use
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
SW1 - A
SW1 - B
SW2 - A
SW2 - B
SW3 - A
SW3 - B
SW4 - A
SW4 - B
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
SW5 - A
SW5 - B
SW6 - A
SW6 - B
SW7 - A
SW7 - B
SW8 - A
SW8 - B
3
4
3
4
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
9
10
12
14
16
11
13
15
11
13
15
158
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Y1151A
The Y1151A supports up to two of the Agilent microwave switches
shown below.
Agilent Switch
87104A/B/C
87106A/B/C
87406B
Description
SP4T 4 port latching
SP6T 6 port latching
6 port matrix
Y1151A Switch Options Supported
(Recommended options are shaded).
Option Name
Option Number
Description and Comments
Frequency Range
letter suffix in model
number
All options supported
Coil Voltage
STD (no options)
+24VDC nominal (+20VDC to +32VDC allowed)
16 pin ribbon cable header
DC Connector Type
STD
100
Solder lugs
Can use ribbon cables with the Y1150A, or
discrete wires with the Y1155A.
Calibration
Certificate
UK6, UKS
All options supported
Drive Options
STD
T24
Direct coil connections for open drain drive
TTL/CMOS compatible
All switches on the same distribution board must
use the same drive mode.
T00 (87406 only)
Solder lugs and TTL/5V CMOS compatible
options combined - see comments above.
L4400 User’s Guide
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Y1151A Connections
LED Connectors
Switch
Connectors
Y1151A Switch Connector SW1 and SW2
2
1
16
15
Pin
Use
Pin
2
Use
1
+VR
+VI
3
5
Path 1
Path 2
Path 3
Path 4
Path 5
Path 6
GND
4
IND 1
6
IND 2
7
8
IND 3
9
10
12
14
16
IND 4
11
13
15
IND 5
IND 6
Open All Paths
+VR is the Voltage source for the Relay
+VI is the Voltage source the LED Indicator
160
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Pin 1
Pin 1
Item
Description
Example Part Numbers
Cable Type
16 conductor ribbon cable, 0.050" pitch, 26 or
28 AWG stranded
3M 3801/16 (26 AWG)
3M 3365/16 (28 AWG)
Y1151A Connector
Switch Connector
Cable Wiring
16 pin socket connector, 0.1" x 0.1" pin grid,
IDC termination, center polarizing key
3M P/N 89116-0101
AMP P/N 76288-3
16 pin socket connector, 0.1" x 0.1" pin grid,
IDC termination, center polarizing key
3M P/N 89116-0101
AMP P/N 76288-3
Y1151A connector pin 1 to switch connector
pin 1
L4400 User’s Guide
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Y1151A Switch Control
All channels are single drive.
Path Closed
Path Open
SW1 Path 1
SW1 Path 2
SW1 Path 3
SW1 Path 4
SW1 Path 5
SW1 Path 6
SW1 Open All 1
SW2 Open All 1
ROUT:CLOS (@xx01)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx02)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx03)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx04)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx05)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx06)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx07)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx08)
Close another path or open all
Close another path or open all
Close another path or open all
Close another path or open all
Close another path or open all
Close another path or open all
Path Closed
Path Open
SW2 Path 1
SW2 Path 2
SW2 Path 3
SW2Path 4
ROUT:CLOS (@xx11)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx12)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx13)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx14)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx15)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx16)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx17)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx18)
Close another path or open all
Close another path or open all
Close another path or open all
Close another path or open all
Close another path or open all
Close another path or open all
SW2 Path 5
SW2 Path 6
SW2 Open All 2
SW2 Open All 2
162
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Y1151A LED Connectors LED1 and LED2
2
1
16
15
LED1 Connector
LED2 Connector
Pin
1
Use
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
Pin
2
Use
Pin
1
Use
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
Pin
2
Use
SW1 - Path 1
SW1 - Path 2
SW1 - Path 3
SW1 - Path 4
SW1 - Path 5
SW1 - Path 6
Not Used
SW2- Path 1
SW2 - Path 2
SW2 - Path 3
SW2 - Path 4
SW2 - Path 5
SW2 - Path 6
Not Used
3
4
3
4
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
9
10
12
14
16
11
13
15
11
13
15
Not Used
Not Used
L4400 User’s Guide
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Y1152A
The Y1152A supports one of the 87xxx switches and up to two of the Agilent
N181x switches. Supported switches are shown below.
Agilent Switch
87204A/B/C
87206A/B/C
87606B
Description
SP4T 4 port latching
SP6T 6 port latching
6 port matrix
N1810UL
Unterminated latching 3-port (SPDT)
Terminated latching 3-port (SPDT)
Terminated latching 4-port (transfer)
Unterminated latching 5-port
N1810TL
N1811TL
N1812UL
Y1152A Switch Options Supported
(Recommended options are shaded).
Option Name
Option Number
Description and Comments
Frequency Range
letter suffix in model All options supported
number
Coil Voltage
STD (no options)
+24VDC nominal (+20VDC to +32VDC allowed)
DC Connector Type
STD
100
16 pin ribbon cable header
Solder lugs
Can use ribbon cables with the Y1152A, or
discrete wires with the Y1155A.
Calibration certificate UK6, UKS
Drive Options STD
All options supported
Direct coil connections for open collector drive
164
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Y1152A Connections
LED Connectors
Switch
Connectors
Y1152A Switch connector SW1 (87204/06)
2
1
16
15
Pin
Use
Pin
2
Use
1
+VR
N.C.
3
5
Close 1
Close 2
Close 3
Close 4
Close 5
Close 6
GND
4
Open 1
Open 2
Open 3
Open 4
Open 5
Open 6
N.C.
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
11
13
15
L4400 User’s Guide
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Y1152A Switch Connector SW2 and SW3 (N181x)
2
1
10
9
Pin
1
Use
Pin
2
Use
GND
IND B
+VI
3
N.C.
4
5
Drive B
Drive A
+VR
6
IND A
+VI
7
8
9
10
N.C.
+VR is the Voltage source for the Relay
+VI is the Voltage source for the LED Indicator
Pin 1
Pin 1
Switch Connector
Pin 1
Distribution Board Connector
No Connection
To This Pin
166
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Example Part Numbers
7
16 Conductor Cable
Item
Description
Cable Type
16 conductor ribbon cable, 0.050" pitch, 26 or
28 AWG stranded
3M 3801/16 (26 AWG)
3M 3365/16 (28 AWG)
Y1152A Connector
Switch Connector
Cable Wiring
10 pin socket connector, 0.1" x 0.1" pin grid,
IDC termination, center polarizing key
3M P/N 89116-0101
AMP P/N 76288-3
16 pin socket connector, 0.1" x 0.1" pin grid,
IDC termination, center polarizing key
3M P/N 89116-0101
AMP P/N 76288-3
Y1152A connector pin 1 to switch connector
pin 1
9 Conductor Cable
Item
Description
Example Part Numbers
Cable Type
9 conductor ribbon cable, 0.050" pitch, 26 or
28 AWG stranded
3M 3801/09 (26 AWG)
3M 3365/09 (28 AWG)
Y1150A Connector
Switch Connector
Cable Wiring
10 pin socket connector, 0.1" x 0.1" pin grid,
IDC termination, center polarizing key
3M P/N 89110-0101
AMP P/N 76288-1
9 pin D-sub male, IDC termination, without
threaded insert
3M P/N 8209-6000
AMP P/N 747306-4
Y1152A socket connector pin 1 to switch
D-sub connector pin 1
(Note: pin 10 of Y1152A connector not used)
Y1152A Switch Control
All channels are driven in PAIRed mode.
Path closed*
Path open*
SW1 Path1
SW1 Path2
SW1 Path3
SW1 Path4
SW1 Path5
SW1 Path6
ROUT:OPEN (@xx01)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx01)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx02)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx03)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx04)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx05)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx06)
State B
ROUT:OPEN (@xx02)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx03)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx04)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx05)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx06)
State A
SW2
SW3
ROUT:OPEN (@xx07)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx08)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx07)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx08)
* For switches connected to SW1, note the path closed is accomplished with the ROUTe:OPENcommand.
L4400 User’s Guide
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Y1152A LED Connectors LED1 and LED2
2
1
16
15
LED1 Connector
LED2 Connector
Pin
1
Use
Pin
2
Use
Pin
1
Use
Pin
2
Use
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
SW1 - Close 1
SW1 - Open 1
SW1 - Close 2
SW1 - Open 2
SW1 - Close 3
SW1 - Open 3
SW1 - Close 4
SW1 - Open 4
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
SW1 - Close 5
SW1 - Open 5
SW1 - Close 6
SW1 - Open 6
SW2 - Ind A
SW2 - Ind B
SW3 - Ind A
SW3 - Ind B
3
4
3
4
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
9
10
12
14
16
11
13
15
11
13
15
168
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Y1153A
The Y1153A supports the attenuators listed below. Up to two of the
attenuators may be connected.
Agilent Attenuator Description
84904K/L
84906K/L
84907K/L
84904M
11 dB max, 1 dB steps, 4 sections
90 dB max, 10 dB steps, 4 sections
70 dB max, 10 dB steps, 3 sections
11 dB max, 1 dB steps, 4 sections
60 dB max, 10 dB steps, 3 sections
65 dB max, 5 dB steps, 4 sections
11 dB max, 1 dB steps, 4 sections
70 dB max, 10 dB steps, 3 sections
110 dB max, 10 dB steps, 4 sections
84905M
84908M
8494G/H
8495G/H
8496G/H
Y1153A Attenuator Options Supported
(Recommended options are shaded).
84904/5/6/7/8
Option Name
Option Number
Description and Comments
Frequency Range
letter suffix in
model number
All options supported
RF Connectors
Coil Voltage
various
011
All options supported
+5VDC
015
+15VDC
024
+24VDC (required if using internal power)
10 pin ribbon cable header
All options supported
DC Connector Type
STD
UK6
Calibration Certificate
L4400 User’s Guide
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
8494/5/6
Option Name
Option Number
Description and Comments
Frequency Range
letter suffix in
model number
All options supported
RF connectors
Coil Voltage
various
STD
All options supported
+24VDC
DC connector type
STD
12 pin Viking connector (includes 5 foot cable
with Viking connector on one end, no
terminations on other end)
016
Flat Pack - ribbon cable connected to attenuator
with 14 pin DIP header on free end. Not
recommended.
Calibration certificate
UK6
All options supported
Y1153A Connections
LED Connectors
Attenuator
Ribbon Connectors
Attenuator
Screw Terminals
170
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Y1153A Attenuator connector P101 and P102 (84904/5/8)
2
1
10
9
Pin
Use
Pin
2
Use
1
Section 1 Thru Line
N.C.
Section 1 Atten
Section 3 Thru Line
Section 4 Thru Line
Section 2 Atten
+VR
3
5
7
9
4
Section 2 Thru Line
Section 4 Atten
Section 3 Atten
6
8
10
You may use either the ribbon cable header or the screw terminals to make
connections to the attenuators. You should not use both.
NOTE
Pin 1
84904/5/6/7/8
Item
Description
Example Part Numbers
Cable Type
10 conductor ribbon cable, 0.050" pitch,
26 or 28 AWG stranded
3M 3801/10 (26 AWG)
3M 3365/10 (28 AWG)
Y1153A Connector
Attenuator Connector
Cable Wiring
10 pin socket connector, 0.1" x 0.1" pin
grid, IDC termination, center polarizing key
3M P/N 89110-0101
AMP P/N 76288-1
10 pin socket connector, 0.1" x 0.1" pin
grid, IDC termination, center polarizing key
3M P/N 89110-0101
AMP P/N 76288-1
Y1153A connector pin 1 to attenuator connector pin 1
L4400 User’s Guide
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
8494/5/6
Item
Description
Example Part Numbers
Cable Supplied with
Attenuator
Cable with Viking connector on attenuator
end, bare wires on other end
Agilent 8120-2178
Cable Type
12 conductor round cable, 22 or 24 AWG
stranded, 0.25" dia.
Y1153A Connection
Attenuator Connector
Screw terminals provided on Y1153A
distribution cable connection
12 pin Viking Industries, Inc. circular connector Viking connector body
TNP12-102P
contacts TS-100-AU
Cable Wiring
See attenuator manual
Y1153A Attenuator Control
All channel are operated in PAIRed mode.
Attenuation Section In Attenuation Section Out
ATTEN 1 SECTION 1
ATTEN 1 SECTION 2
ATTEN 1 SECTION 3
ATTEN 1 SECTION 4
ATTEN 2 SECTION 1
ATTEN 2 SECTION 2
ATTEN 2 SECTION 3
ATTEN 2 SECTION 4
ROUT:OPEN (@xx01)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx02)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx03)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx04)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx05)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx06)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx07)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx08)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx01)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx02)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx03)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx04)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx05)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx06)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx07)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx08)
ROUTe:OPENadds that section's attenuation amount to the overall
attenuation. Total attenuation is the sum of the dB amounts for the
individual sections switched in.
NOTE
When all channels open at reset maximum attenuation is set.
172
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Y1153A LED Connectors LED1 and LED2
2
1
16
15
LED1 Connector
LED2 Connector
Pin
1
Use
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
Pin
2
Use
Pin
1
Use
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
Pin
2
Use
P101 Atten 1
P102 Atten 1
3
4
P101 Thru Line 1
P101 Atten 2
3
4
P102 Thru Line 1
P102 Atten 2
5
6
5
6
7
8
P101 Thru Line 2
P101 Atten 3
7
8
P102 Thru Line 2
P102 Atten 3
9
10
12
14
16
9
10
12
14
16
11
13
15
P101 Thru Line 3
P101 Atten 4
11
13
15
P102 Thru Line 3
P102 Atten 4
P101 Thru Line 4
P102 Thru Line 4
L4400 User’s Guide
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Y1154A
The Y1154A supports one of the transfer switches listed below and up to six
N181x switches.
Agilent Switch
Description
87222C/D/E
N1810UL
N1810TL
4 port transfer switch
Unterminated latching 3-port (SPDT)
Terminated latching 3-port (SPDT)
Terminated latching 4-port (transfer)
Unterminated latching 5-port
N1811TL
N1812UL
Y1154A Switch Options Supported
(Recommended options are shaded).
Option Name
Option Number
Description and Comments
Frequency Range
letter suffix in
model number
All options supported
Coil Voltage
STD (no options)
+24VDC nominal (+20VDC to +32VDC allowed)
10 pin ribbon cable header
DC Connector Type
STD
100
Solder lugs
Can use ribbon cables with the Y1154A,
or discrete wires with the Y1155A.
Mounting Bracket
Calibration Certificate
Drive Options
201
UK6
STD
All options supported
All options supported
Direct coil connections for open collector drive
and TTL/5V CMOS compatible inputs standard
174
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Y1154A Connections
LED Connectors
Transfer Switch
Connectors
Switch Connectors
Y1154A Switch connector SW1 and SW2 (87222)
14
13
2
1
Pin
Use
Pin
2
Use
1
+VR
+VI
3
5
Drive A
Drive B
N.C.
4
Ind A
Ind B
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
6
7
8
9
GND
10
12
14
11
13
N.C.
N.C.
L4400 User’s Guide
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Y1154A Switch connector SW3 Through SW8 (N181x)
2
1
10
9
Pin
Use
Pin
2
Use
1
GND
IND B
+VI
3
5
7
9
N.C.
4
Drive B
Drive A
+VR
6
IND A
+VI
8
10
N.C.
+VR is the Voltage source for the Relay
+VI is the Voltage source for the LED Indicator
Distribution Board Connector
Switch Connector
No Connection
To These Pins
Switch Connector
Pin 1
Distribution Board Connector
No Connection
To This Pin
176
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Example Part Numbers
7
87222 Cable
Item
Description
Cable Type
10 conductor ribbon cable, 0.050" pitch, 26 or
28 AWG stranded
3M 3801/10 (26 AWG)
3M 3365/10 (28 AWG)
Y1154A Connector
Switch Connector
Cable Wiring
14 pin socket connector, 0.1" x 0.1" pin grid,
IDC termination, center polarizing key
3M P/N 89114-0101
AMP P/N 76288-2
10 pin socket connector, 0.1" x 0.1" pin grid,
IDC termination, center polarizing key
3M P/N 89110-0101
AMP P/N 76288-1
Y1154A connector pin 1 to switch connector
pin 1 (Note: pins 11 - 14 of 14 pin connector not
used)
9 Conductor Cable
Item
Description
Example Part Numbers
Cable Type
9 conductor ribbon cable, 0.050" pitch, 26 or
28 AWG stranded
3M 3801/09 (26 AWG)
3M 3365/09 (28 AWG)
Y1154A Connector
Switch Connector
Cable Wiring
10 pin socket connector, 0.1" x 0.1" pin grid,
IDC termination, center polarizing key
3M P/N 89110-0101
AMP P/N 76288-1
9 pin D-sub male, IDC termination, without
threaded insert
3M P/N 8209-6000
AMP P/N 747306-4
Y1154A socket connector pin 1 to switch
D-sub connector pin 1
(Note: pin 10 of Y1154A connector not used)
Y1154A Switch Control
All channels are operated in PAIRed mode.
State A
State B
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
ROUT:OPEN (@xx01)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx02)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx03)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx04)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx05)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx06)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx07)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx08)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx01)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx02)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx03)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx04)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx05)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx06)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx07)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx08)
L4400 User’s Guide
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Y1154A LED Connectors LED1 and LED2
2
1
16
15
LED1 Connector
LED2 Connector
Pin
1
Use
Pin
2
Use
Pin
1
Use
Pin
2
Use
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
SW1 - A
SW1 - B
SW2 - A
SW2 - B
SW3 - A
SW3 - B
SW4 - A
SW4 - B
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
SW5 - A
SW5 - B
SW6 - A
SW6 - B
SW7 - A
SW7 - B
SW8 - A
SW8 - B
3
4
3
4
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
9
10
12
14
16
11
13
15
11
13
15
178
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Y1155A
The Y1155A provides screw terminal connections can support the Agilent
switches listed below. Additionally, the screw terminals make it adaptable to
most any switch.
Agilent Switch
8762A/B/C
8762F
Description
Terminated latching 3-port (SPDT)
75 ohm terminated SPDT
Terminated latching 4-port (transfer)
Terminated latching 5-port
Numerous
8763A/B/C
8764A/B/C
Other Switches
When using the Y1155A, the ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:PRESet
the wide variety of switches and devices available. You will need to
manually configure the channel drive attributes to ensure safe reset
operations of these switch systems.
NOTE
L4400 User’s Guide
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Y1155A Switch Options Supported
Recommended options are shaded.
Option Name
Frequency Range
Coil Voltage
Option Number Description and Comments
Various
011
All options supported
+5VDC
+5VDC
Highest coil current requirement of all coil voltage
options. May limit system speed because current
capacity limitations. 34945EXT limits total switch
current to 2A; opt 011 coils draw 400 mA. Therefore, a
maximum of 5 devices may be switched simultaneously.
015
+15VDC
024
+24VDC (required if using internal power)
solder lugs
DC Connector Type
RF Performance
Drive Options
STD
various
STD
T24
All options supported
Direct coil connections for open collector drive
TTL/5V CMOS compatible inputs with +24VDC coils
(Note: position indicators do not function; wiring
pattern differs from direct drive)
T15
TTL/5V CMOS compatible inputs with +15VDC coils
(Note: position indicators do not function; wiring
pattern differs from direct drive)
180
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Y1155A Connections
LED Connectors
Screw
Termina ls
+VR is the Voltage source for the Relay
+VI is the Voltage source for the LED Indicator
876x Switches
Item
Description
Cable Type
3 wire cable, 24 AWG stranded
Y1155A Connector
Switch Connector
Cable Wiring
Screw terminal connection for wire provided on Y1155A
Solder wire to switch solder lug
Varies with drive option; see switch documentation
L4400 User’s Guide
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Y1155A Switch Control
Paired Operations*
Drive 1
ROUT:OPEN (@xx01)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx02)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx03)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx04)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx05)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx06)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx07)
ROUT:OPEN (@xx08)
Drive 11
Drive 12
Drive 13
Drive 14
Drive 15
Drive 16
Drive 17
Drive 18
ROUT:CLOS (@xx01)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx02)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx03)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx04)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx05)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx06)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx07)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx08)
Drive 2
Drive 3
Drive 4
Drive 5
Drive 6
Drive 7
Drive 8
* PAIRedoperation must be configured manually. The ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:PRESetdoes not
configure Y1155A channels for PAIRedoperations.
Unpaired Operations
Drive 1
Drive 2
Drive 3
Drive 4
Drive 5
Drive 6
Drive 7
Drive 8
Drive 11
Drive 12
Drive 13
Drive 14
Drive 15
Drive 16
Drive 17
Drive 18
ROUT:CLOS (@xx01)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx02)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx03)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx04)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx05)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx06)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx07)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx08)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx11)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx12)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx13)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx14)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx15)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx16)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx17)
ROUT:CLOS (@xx18)
182
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Y1155A LED Connectors LED1 and LED2
2
1
16
15
LED1 Connector
LED2 Connector
Pin
1
Use
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
Pin
2
Use
Pin
1
Use
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
+VI
Pin
2
Use
SW1 - A
SW1 - B
SW2 - A
SW2 - B
SW3 - A
SW3 - B
SW4 - A
SW4 - B
SW5 - A
SW5 - B
SW6 - A
SW6 - B
SW7 - A
SW7 - B
SW8 - A
SW8 - B
3
4
3
4
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
9
10
12
14
16
11
13
15
11
13
15
L4400 User’s Guide
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Simplified Connection Diagrams
Single Drive With Separate Position Indicators
The simplified schematic below illustrates the connection for a single drive
switch with separate position indicators. The position indicators for this type
of switch are independent relay contacts that are mechanically linked to the
RF switch position.
Even though this is a single drive switch, each switch state has its own coil.
The switch uses internal logic to open all paths except the one being closed.
The RF paths are not shown in the simplified diagram. The coils are driven in
open collector mode. The position indicator is set so that a high level indicates
an active switch. The logic level of the position indicator can be inverted using
the ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify:POLarity command.
The schematic shown is similar to the Agilent 87104A/B/C, 87106A/B/C, and
87406B switches. Many other switches use this technique (both with and
without the position indicator).
34945EXT
Switch
Y1155A
Distribution
Board
6
5
4
3
2
1
Logic Gate
Sense
IND 1
To IND 2 through 6
Pull Down
Resistor
+VI
+VR
Open
All
5
4
3
2
1
6
Open Collector
Output Driver
DRV 1
To DRV 7
To DRV 2 through 6
184
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Paired Drive With Separate Position Indicators
The simplified schematic below illustrates the connection for a dual drive
switch with separate position indicators. The position indicators for this type
of switch are independent relay contacts that are mechanically linked to the
RF switch position.
The RF paths are not shown in the simplified diagram. The coils are driven in
open collector mode. The position indicator is set so that a high level indicates
an active switch. The logic level of the position indicator can be inverted using
the ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify:POLarity command.
As shown, Channel 01 was pulsed to close Coil A. The corresponding position
indicator also closed. Closing position indicator A opens position indicator B.
The schematic shown is similar to the Agilent N181x series of switches.
Y1155A
34945EXT
Switch
Distribution
Board
Logic Gate
Sense
IND 11
IND 1
Pull Down
Resistor
A
B
+VI
+VR
Coil B
Coil A
Open Collector
Output Drivers
DRV 1
DRV 11
L4400 User’s Guide
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
Paired Drive With Combined Position Indicators
The simplified schematic below illustrates the connection for a dual drive
switch with an integral position indicator. The position indicators for this type
of switch are electrically connected to the device’s drive coil. This is a typical
arrangement for microwave attenuators. For these types of position indicators,
you must make a parallel connection at the distribution board between the
channel drive and the indicator input.
With these types of devices, positive voltage is present on the paired coil
opposite the position the switch is currently in. Typically you will need to
invert the logic level of the position indicator using the
ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify:POLarity command.
As shown, Channel 01 was pulsed to close Port 1. The corresponding position
indicator also closed.
The schematic shown is similar to the Agilent 876x series of switches and 849x
series of step attenuators.
Y1155A
Distribution
Board
34945EXT
Logic Gate
Switch
Sense
IND 11
Drive Port 2 –
Pull Down
Resistor
+VR
Drive Common +
Logic Gate
Sense
IND 1
+VI
Pull Down
Resistor
Drive Port 1 –
Pivot
Armature
Open Collector
Output Drivers
DRV 1
DRV 11
Port 1
Port C
Port 2
186
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Mounting the Remote Modules
The figure below shows the dimensions of the remote module and the locations
of usable mounting holes.
38.35
205.54
114.1
57.05
All Mounting Holes are
Metric M4X0.7 Threads
11.34
9.73
11.73
15.05
41.74
114.1
84
114.1
26.6
30.96
280.64
L4400 User’s Guide
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
L4445A Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
SCPI Programming Examples
These programming examples provide you with SCPI command examples to
use for driving the microwave switch modules.
The channel addressing scheme used in these examples follow the form 1rcc
where r is the remote module number (1 through 8), and cc is the
two-digit channel number. For more information about channel numbering,
refer to “Channel Numbering” on page 143.
For complete information on SCPI commands, see the Programmer’s
Reference Help file.
Example: Configuring an Agilent N1810UL
The following example illustrate controlling an Agilent N1810UL attached to a
Y1150A distribution board. The distribution board is connected to Bank 1 of
the first remote module attached to the L4445A. This example uses the bank
preset (described on page 153).
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce OFF,(@1100)
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:PRESet BANK1,(@1100)
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce INT,(@1101)
ROUT:CLOSe (@1101)
Example: Configuring a Paired Drive Channel
The following example illustrates the sequence of commands used to configure
a paired drive channel. In the example, the operations are directed to channel
1 on remote module 3.
The drive source must be disabled before configuring either the channel
pairing or the pulse mode. The channel is then paired and the pulse width set
to 15 ms. Power supply recovery time and settling time is then set to 12 ms and
10 ms, respectively. Verify is then enabled. The default behavior for the
switches is set to OPENand TTL drive using an EXTernalpower supply. Finally,
the channel is closed.
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce OFF,(@1300)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PAIRed ON,(@1301)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PULSe 0.015,(@1301)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIME:SETTle 0.012,(@1301)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIME:RECovery 0.010,(@1301)
ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify ON,(@1301)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:OPEN:DEFault (@1301)
ROUTe:RMODule:BANK:DRIVe:MODE TTL,BANK1,(@1300)
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce EXT,(@1300)
ROUT:CLOSe (@1301)
188
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
7
Example: Configuring a Single Drive Channel
The following example illustrates the sequence of commands to configure a
single drive channel with continuous drive. In the example, the operations are
directed to channel 1 on remote module 3.
The drive source must be disabled before configuring pulse or paired modes.
The channel is then un- paired and the pulse mode disabled (enables
continuous drive). Power supply recovery time and settling time
is then set to 10 ms and 12 ms, respectively. Verify is then enabled.
The switches are set to a CLOSe default state and OCOLlector drive with an
EXTernal power supply is selected. The channel is closed. The final query of
the channel state involves querying both verified state and whether channel
drive is occurring.
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce OFF,(@1300)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PAIRed OFF,(@1301)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:PULSe:MODE OFF,(@1301)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIME:SETTle 0.010,(@1301)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:TIME:RECovery 0.012,(@1301)
ROUTe:CHANnel:VERify ON,(@1301)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVe:CLOSe:DEFault (@1301)
ROUTe:RMOD:BANK:DRIVe:MODE OCOLlector,BANK1,(@1300)
ROUTe:RMODule:DRIVe:SOURce EXT,(@1300)
ROUT:CLOSe (@1301)
ROUT:CLOSe? (@1301)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVE:STATe? (@1301)
The ROUTe:CHANnel:DRIVE:STATe? query returns a 0 if the channel is not
being driven and a 1 if the channel is being driven.
L4400 User’s Guide
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Microwave Switch/Attenuator Driver
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
190
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
L4450A SCPI Command Summary
Table 8- 1 lists the instrument-specific SCPI commands that apply to the
L4450A 64- Bit Digital I/O and Counter instrument. Table 3- 3 (Chapter 3) lists
the SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments.
For complete information on all SCPI commands, refer to the Programmer’s
Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD- ROM (p/n
34989- 13601).
Table 8-1. L4450A SCPI Command Summary.
Commands
Subsystem
CONFigure
(Counter /
Totalizer)
CONFigure:COUNter:DCYCle [{<gate_time>|MIN|MAX|DEF},] (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:COUNter:FREQuency [{<gate_time>|MIN|MAX|DEF},]
(@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:COUNter:PERiod [{<gate_time>|MIN|MAX|DEF},] (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:COUNter:PWIDth [{<gate_time>|MIN|MAX|DEF},]
(@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:COUNter:TOTalize [{READ|RRESet},] (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:TOTalize [{READ|RRESet},] (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital {BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}, [<voltage>,] [{NOR-
Mal|INVerted},] (@<ch_list>)
(Digital I/O)
CONFigure:DIGital:DIRection {INPut|0|OUTPut|1}, (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:DIRection? (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake SYNChronous, [<thresh_voltage>,
[<level_voltage>, [<polarity>,]]] (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:CTIMe {<seconds>|MIN|MAX|DEF},
(@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:CTIMe? [{MIN|MAX},] (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:DRIVe {ACTive|OCOLlector}, (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:DRIVe? (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted},
[{H0|0|H1|1|H2|2|ALL},] (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:POLarity? {H0|0|H1|1|H2|2}, (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:RATE {<frequency>|MIN|MAX|DEF},
(@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:RATE? [{MIN|MAX},] (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:STATe {HIMPedance|OFF|ON},
(@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:STATe? (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:SYNChronous:STRobe[:SOURce]
{INTernal|EXTernal}, (@<ch_list>)
192
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:SYNChronous:STRobe[:SOURce]?
(@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:INTerrupt:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}, (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:INTerrupt:POLarity? (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}, (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:POLarity? (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:WIDTh {BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}, (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:WIDTh? (@<ch_list>)
MEASure
(Counter /
Totalizer)
MEASure:COUNter:DCYCle? [{<gate_time>|MIN|MAX|DEF},] (@<ch_list>)
MEASure:COUNter:FREQuency? [{<gate_time>|MIN|MAX|DEF},]
(@<ch_list>)
MEASure:COUNter:PERiod? [{<gate_time>|MIN|MAX|DEF},] (@<ch_list>)
MEASure:COUNter:PWIDth? [{<gate_time>|MIN|MAX|DEF},] (@<ch_list>)
MEASure:COUNter:TOTalize? [{READ|RRESet},] (@<ch_list>)
(Digital I/O)
MEASure:DIGital? {BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}, [<voltage>,]
[{NORMal|INVerted} , ] (@<ch_list>)
SENSe
(Counter /
Totalizer)
[SENSe:]COUNter:ABORt (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:DATA? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe]:COUNter:DCYCle[:DATA]? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:FREQuency[:DATA]? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:FUNCtion {FREQuency|PERiod|DCYCle|PWIDth|
TOTalize}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:FUNCtion? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:GATE:POLarity {NORMal|INVerted}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:GATE:POLarity? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:GATE:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:GATE:SOURce? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:GATE:TIME[:INTernal] {<time>|MIN|MAX|DEF},
(@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:GATE:TIME[:INTernal]? [{MIN|MAX},] (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:INITiate (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:PERiod[:DATA]? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:PWIDth[:DATA]? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:SLOPe {NEGative|POSitive}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:SLOPe? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:THReshold:VOLTage {<voltage>|MIN|MAX|DEF},
(@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:THReshold:VOLTage? [{MIN|MAX},] (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:TOTalize:CLEar:IMMediate (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:TOTalize[:DATA]? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:TOTalize:TYPE {READ|RRESet}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]COUNter:TOTalize:TYPE? (@<ch_list>)
L4400 User’s Guide
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
[SENSe:]MODule:COUNter:GATE:THReshold[:VOLTage]
{<voltage>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, 1
[SENSe:]MODule:COUNter:GATE:THReshold[:VOLTage]? [{MIN|MAX},] 1
[SENSe:]TOTalize:CLEar:IMMediate (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:DATA? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:SLOPe {NEGative|POSitive}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:SLOPe? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:THReshold[:MODE] {AC|TTL}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:THReshold[:MODE]? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:THReshold:VOLTage {<voltage>|MIN|MAX|DEF},
(@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:THReshold:VOLTage? [{MIN|MAX},] (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:TYPE {READ|RRESet}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:TYPE? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:DATA[:{BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}]? [{DECi-
mal|BINary|HEXadecimal|OCTal},] (@<ch_list>)
(Digital I/O)
[SENSe:]DIGital:DATA:BIT? <bit>, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:HANDshake:THReshold {<voltage>|MIN|MAX|DEF},
(@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:HANDshake:THReshold? [{MIN|MAX},] (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:INTerrupt[:ENABle] {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:INTerrupt[:ENABle]? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:INTerrupt:MODE {MFULl|COMPare}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:INTerrupt:MODE? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:INTerrupt:STATus? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory:CLEar (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory:COMPare:ACTion {CONTinue|STARt|STOP},
(@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory:COMPare:ACTion? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory[:DATA]? <index>, <count>, (@<channel>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory[:DATA]:ALL? (@<channel>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory[:DATA]:FORMat {LIST|BLOCk}
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory[:DATA]:FORMat?
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory[:DATA]:POINts? [MAX,] (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory:ENABle {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory:ENABle? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory:MATCh[:DATA]? (@<ch_list>)
SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory:SAMPle:COUNt {<count>|MIN|MAX|DEF|INFinity},
(@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory:STARt (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory:STEP (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory:STOP (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:THReshold {<voltage>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:THReshold? [{MIN|MAX},] (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory:COMPare:ACTion {CONTinue|STARt|STOP},
(@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory:COMPare:ACTion? (@<ch_list>)
(Digital
Pattern
Compare)
194
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
SOURce
(Digital I/O)
SOURce:DIGital:DATA[:{BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}] <data>, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:DATA[:{BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}]?
[{DECimal|BINary|HEXadecimal|OCTal},] (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:DATA:BIT {0|1}, <bit>, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:DATA:BIT? <bit>, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:DRIVe {ACTive|OCOLlector}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:DRIVe? (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:HANDshake:LEVel {<voltage>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:HANDshake:LEVel? [{MIN|MAX},] (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:INTerrupt[:ENABle] {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:INTerrupt[:ENABle]? (@<ch_list>)
:SOURce:DIGital:INTerrupt:MODE {STARt|STOP|GATE}, (@<ch_list>)
:SOURce:DIGital:INTerrupt:MODE? (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:LEVel {<voltage>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:LEVel? [{MIN|MAX},] (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:ABORt (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:ENABle {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:ENABle? (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:NCYCles {<count>|MIN|MAX|DEF|INFinity},
(@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:NCYCles? [{MIN|MAX},] (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:STARt (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:STEP (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:STOP (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:TRACe <name>, (@<channel>)
SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:TRACe? (@<channel>)
SOURce:DIGital:STATe {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:STATe? (@<ch_list>)
(External
Clock Output)
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:FREQuency {<frequency>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, 1
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:FREQuency? [{MIN|MAX}, ] 1
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:LEVel {<voltage>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, 1
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:LEVel? [{MIN|MAX}, ] 1
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:STATe {OFF|0|ON|1}, 1
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:STATe? 1
TRACe:CATalog? {(@<channel>)|1}
TRACe
TRACe[:DATA]:DIGital[:{BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}] (@<channel>),
<name>, {<binary_block>|<value>, <value> [,<value>, ...]}
TRACe[:DATA]:DIGital:FUNCtion (@<channel>), {COUNt|WONes}, <name>,
<points>
TRACe:DELete:ALL {(@<channel>)|1}
TRACe:DELete[:NAME] {(@<channel>)|1}, <name>
TRACe:FREE? {(@<channel>)|1}
TRACe:POINts? {(@<channel>)|1}, <name>
L4400 User’s Guide
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
CALCulate
(Digital
Pattern
CALCulate:COMPare:DATA[:{BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}] <data>,
(@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:COMPare:DATA? (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:COMPare:MASK[:{BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}] <data>,
(@<ch_list>)
Compare)
CALCulate:COMPare:MASK? (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:COMPare:STATe {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:COMPare:STATe? (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:COMPare:TYPE {EQUal|NEQual}, (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:COMPare:TYPE? (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer {<value>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer? [{MIN|MAX},] (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:STATe {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:STATe? (@<ch_list>)
(Alarm Limit)
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer {<value>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer? [{MIN|MAX},] (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:STATe {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:STATe? (@<ch_list>)
(Measure-
ment
CALCulate:AVERage:AVERage? [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:AVERage:CLEar [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:AVERage:COUNt? [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:AVERage:MAXimum? [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:AVERage:MAXimum:TIME? [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:AVERage:MINimum? [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:AVERage:MINimum:TIME? [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:AVERage:PTPeak? [(@<ch_list>)]
Statistics)
(MX + B
Scaling)
CALCulate:SCALe:GAIN <gain> [, (@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:SCALe:GAIN? (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:SCALe:OFFSet <offset> [, (@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:SCALe:OFFSet? (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:SCALe:STATe {OFF|0|ON|1} [, (@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:SCALe:STATe? [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:SCALe:UNIT "<units>" [, (@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:SCALe:UNIT? [(@<ch_list>)]
196
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
ROUTe
(Monitor)
ROUTe:MONitor:DATA?
ROUTe:MONitor:MODE {CHANnel|DMM}
ROUTe:MONitor:MODE?
ROUTe:MONitor:STATe {OFF|0|ON|1}
ROUTe:MONitor:STATe?
ROUTe:MONitor[:CHANnel] (@<channel>)
ROUTe:MONitor[:CHANnel]?
ROUTe:MONitor[:CHANnel]:ENABle {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:MONitor[:CHANnel]:ENABle? (@<ch_list>)
(Scanning)
ABORt
INITiate
ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay {<seconds>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay:AUTO {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay:AUTO? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:SCAN (@<scan_list>)
ROUTe:SCAN?
ROUTe:SCAN:ADD (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:SCAN:REMove (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:SCAN:ORDered {OFF|0|ON|1}
ROUTe:SCAN:ORDered?
ROUTe:SCAN:SIZE?
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel:CLEar:MODule 1
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel[:DEFine] "<label>" , (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel[:DEFine]? [{USER|FACTory},] (@<ch_list>)
(Switch
Control)
ROUTe:SEQuence:CATalog?
(Sequence
Operation)
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine <name>, "<commands>"
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine? <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete:ALL
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete[:NAME] <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:DONE?
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger[:IMMediate] <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce <name>, {ALARm1|ALARm2|MANual}
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce? <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:WAIT
OUTPut:ALARm{1|2}:CLEar
OUTPut
OUTPut:ALARm:CLEar:ALL
(Alarm Limit)
OUTPut:ALARm:MODE {LATCh|TRACk}
OUTPut:ALARm:MODE?
OUTPut:ALARm{1|2}:SEQuence?
OUTPut:ALARm:SLOPe {NEGative|POSitive}
OUTPut:ALARm:SLOPe?
OUTPut:ALARm{1|2}:SOURce (@<ch_list>)
OUTPut:ALARm{1|2}:SOURce?
L4400 User’s Guide
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
FORMat:BORDer {NORMal|SWAPped}
FORMat:BORDer?
FORMat:READing:ALARm {OFF|0|ON|1}
FORMat:READing:ALARm?
FORMat
(Scanning)
FORMat:READing:CHANnel {OFF|0|ON|1}
FORMat:READing:CHANnel?
FORMat:READing:TIME {OFF|0|ON|1}
FORMat:READing:TIME?
FORMat:READing:TIME:TYPE {ABSolute|RELative}
FORMat:READing:TIME:TYPE?
FORMat:READing:UNIT {OFF|0|ON|1}
FORMat:READing:UNIT?
READ?
SWEep:COUNt {<count>|MIN|MAX|DEF}
SWEep:COUNt? [{MIN|MAX}]
SWEep
(Scanning)
*TRG
TRIGger
INITiate
READ? [(@<ch_list>)]
TRIGger:COUNt {<count>|MIN|MAX|DEF|INFinity}
TRIGger:COUNt? [{MIN|MAX}]
TRIGger:DELay {<seconds>|MIN|MAX}
TRIGger:DELay? [{MIN|MAX}]
TRIGger:DELay:AUTO {OFF|0|ON|1}
TRIGger:DELay:AUTO?
TRIGger:SOURce {IMMediate|BUS|EXTernal|TIMer}
TRIGger:SOURce?
TRIGger:SOURce:ALARm[:MODE] {SINGle|CONTinuous}
TRIGger:SOURce:ALARm[:MODE]?
TRIGger:TIMer {<seconds>|MIN|MAX|DEF}
TRIGger:TIMer? [{MIN|MAX}]
(Scanning)
TRIGger:COUNt {<count>|MIN|MAX|DEF|INFinity}
TRIGger:COUNt? [{MIN|MAX}]
TRIGger:SOURce {IMMediate|BUS|EXTernal|ALARm1|ALARm2|TIMer}
TRIGger:SOURce?
TRIGger:TIMer {<seconds>|MIN|MAX|DEF}
TRIGger:TIMer? [{MIN|MAX}]
DATA:POINts:EVENt:THReshold <num_readings>
DATA:POINts:EVENt:THReshold?
DATA:POINts?
DATA:REMove? <num_readings>
FETCh?
Data
(Reading
Memory)
R? [<max_count>]
SYSTem:TIME:SCAN?
(Measure-
ment
DATA:LAST? [,(@<channel>)]
Statistics)
198
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
The L4450A has 64- bits of general-purpose digital I/O grouped in 8- bit
channels with programmable polarity, input thresholds, and output levels. The
module is segmented into two banks of four 8- bit channels. Each bank has 64
Kb of volatile memory for pattern capture and pattern generation with
hardware interrupt capability. Up to three pins of handshaking are available
for each bank of 32 bits.
The module also has two 10 MHz frequency counter/totalizer measurement
input channels and a programmable clock output for frequency
synchronization or general clocking needs.
The digital channels are numbered by bank; 101 through 104 and 201 through
204 for banks 1 and 2 respectively. The counter/totalizer channels are
assigned channel numbers 301 and 302. The programmable clock is not
assigned a channel number.
Bank 1
Bank 2
INTR
INTR
Bit 0
Bit 0
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Channel
201
Channel
101
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 7
Bit 8
Channel
202
Channel
102
Bit 15
Bit 16
Bit 15
Bit 16
DIO
Bank
2
DIO
Bank
1
Channel
203
Channel
103
Bit 23
Bit 24
Bit 23
Bit 24
Channel
204
Channel
104
Bit 31
Bit 31
H0
H1
H2
H0
H1
H2
Counter/
Totalizer
1
32 Bits
24 Bits
IN
Clock
Out
Channel
301
CLK
Gate
20 MHz - 10 Hz
Counter/
Totalizer
2
32 Bits
IN
Channel
302
Gate
L4400 User’s Guide
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
Basic Digital I/O Operations
Channel Numbering and Width
The digital channels are numbered by bank; 101 through 104 and 201 through
204 for banks 1 and 2 respectively.
Using SCPI commands you can group digital I/O channels together to allow 16-
or 32- bit operations. The first and third channels on a bank can be control
channels. Width and direction of the memory operations are controlled by the
width and direction of the first channel on the bank (i.e., 101 or 201). In the
SCPI language for the L4450A, BYTE refers to 8- bit operations, WORD refers to
16- bit operations, and LWORd refers to 32-bit operations.
This diagram illustrates how the channels are numbered for each
configuration.
Bank 1
Bank 2
Channel
104 201
8-bits 8-bits 8-bits 8-bits 8-bits 8-bits 8-bits 8-bits
BYTE (default)
WORD
101
102
103
202
203
204
101
103
201
203
16-bits
101
16-bits
16-bits
201
16-bits
LWORd
32-bits
32-bits
Reading Digital Data
The simplest way to read a digital channel is using the MEASure:DIGital?
query. This query sets the channel to be an input channel and sets all other
channel parameters to the default settings.
For example, sending the following SCPI command to the L4450A will read the
value of the 8- bit channel 102. An unsigned integer value is returned that
represents the state of the 8 bits on channel 102.
MEAS:DIG? BYTE, (@1102)
By adding parameters to the command, you can set the channel width,
threshold, and polarity for read. For example, sending the following SCPI
command you can read the 32- bit channel 201.
MEAS:DIG? LWOR, 2.5, NORM, (@1201)
200
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
To read digital data with more control over the channel parameters,
use the SCPI CONFigureand SENSecommands. The CONFigurecommands set
up the digital I/O channel parameters. For example, sending the following
SCPI command sets 16- bit input channel 103 to use a 2.5 V input threshold,
and normal polarity.
CONF:DIG WORD, 2.5, NORM, (@1103)
Once configured, the data is read using the following command.
SENS:DIG:DATA:WORD? (@1103)
You may also read an individual bit using the SENSe commands.
This allows you to check the state of an individual bit in a channel without
having to create an input mask. For example, the following command returns
the state of bit 3 in the channel 101 byte.
SENS:DIG:DATA:BIT? 3, (@1101)
The acceptable range for the bit parameter is based on the channel width as
shown below:
• BYTE (8- bit): <bit> can range from ‘0’ to ‘7’
• WORD (16-bit): <bit> can range from ‘0’ to ‘15’
• LWORd (32- bit): <bit> can range from ‘0’ to ‘31’
The SENSe command differs from the MEASure command in that it will not
change the direction (input or output) of the channel. If the channel is
configured as an output, the SENSe command will return the value being
driven.
Writing Digital Data
To write digital data, set the channel output parameters using the SOURce
commands. For example, sending the following SCPI commands to a Digital
I/O module in slot 1 sets a 32-bit channel to use normal polarity,
with active drive and a ‘set’ output voltage of 4 volts.
CONF:DIG:WIDT LWOR,(@1201)
CONF:DIG:POL NORM,(@1201)
SOUR:DIG:DRIV ACT,(@1201)
SOUR:DIG:LEV 4,(@1201)
The width and polarity parameters apply to both input and output operations.
L4400 User’s Guide
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
You can set a channel to output in either active drive or open collector
configurations. When set to ACTive, the module drives the digital lines for both
high and low. The voltage level that represents a logic ‘1’ can be set using the
SOURce:DIGital:LEVel command. Output voltages can range from 1.66 V
(default) to 5 V.
When the channel is set to OCOLlector, lines are driven low, but set to high
impedance (Hi- Z) when asserted. In the open collector mode, multiple lines
can be connected together by providing external pull- ups.
When using external pull-ups in the open collector mode, the outputs will
not exceed 5 V.
NOTE
Once a channel has been configured, write digital data to the channel using the
SOURce:DIGital:DATA command.
SOUR:DIG:DATA:LWOR 26503,(@1201)
You may also use a hexadecimal format to represent values in the commands.
For example, to send the decimal value of 26503 in hex use the command form:
SOUR:DIG:DATA:LWOR #h6787,(@1201)
Writing to a channel automatically configures the channel as an output.
NOTE
Note that the data should match the channel width configured using
CONFigure:DIGital:DATA:WIDTh command. The data written is masked
by the configured width so that any extra bytes will be discarded.
For example: sending the value 65531 to a byte wide channel will result
in the channel discarding the upper byte and outputting 251.
Channel Width and Polarity, Threshold, Level, and Drive
When the width of a channel is set to WORD or LWORd, the channel direction
(input or output) of the channels spanned by the width is controlled by the
channel in operation. That is, all grouped channels are automatically set to the
same input or output operation.
Channel settings of polarity, threshold, level, and drive mode are unchanged
when channels are combined. For example, consider the following command
sequence.
CONF:DIG:POL NORM,(@1101)
CONF:DIG:POL INV,(@1102)
CONF:DIG:WIDT WORD,(@1101)
202
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
This command sequence sets the first 8 bits (channel 101) to normal polarity
for input and output operations, set the next 8 bits (channel 102) to inverted
polarity, and then combines the bits into a 16- bit channel. When this WORD
channel is used, the first eight bits will input or output using normal polarity
but the next 8 bits will read or written using inverted polarity.
Threshold, level, and drive settings all behave in the same manner as the
polarity setting described above.
Handshaking
Handshaking provides a means to synchronize the input or output of digital
data. By default, no handshaking is used and data is input or output as the
command is executed. The handshake is configured per bank.
The L4450A provides a synchronous strobed handshake mode. You can use
this mode with basic input and output operations. You must use this
page 210).
The handshake is performed using three lines on each bank. The lines are
labeled H0, H1, and H2. The function of each line is set by the input or output
mode in use. Since there are only three handshake lines per bank, the SCPI
handshake commands are only valid for the first channel in a bank. Once
handshaking is enabled, it applies to the width of the first channel in the bank.
The three handshaking lines on each bank also differ slightly if you are using
perform unbuffered operations without any handshake. The function of
each line for each mode of operation is defined in the table below.
H0
H1
H2
Unbuffered Synchronous
Input
I/O Direction (output) Strobe (output) Not Used (Hi-Z)
Unbuffered Synchronous
Output
I/O Direction (output) Strobe (output) Not Used (Hi-Z)
Buffered Synchronous Input
Start/Stop (output)
Not Used (Hi-Z) Input Strobe (input)
Strobe (output) Not Used (Hi-Z)
Buffered Synchronous Output Start/Stop (output)
(internal clock)
Buffered Synchronous Output Start/Stop (output)
(external clock)
Not Used (Hi-Z) Output Strobe
(input)
L4400 User’s Guide
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
The following handshake command sets the synchronous handshaking mode
for the channels in bank 1.
CONF:DIG:HAND SYNC, (@1101)
This form of the handshaking command also allows you to optionally set the
input threshold, output drive level, and polarity of all the handshake lines. For
example, the following command sets bank 2 to use synchronous handshaking,
with an input threshold of 2.5 V, an output drive level of 2.5 V, and normal
polarity. Other parameters such as the handshake timing are set to default
values (refer to the Programmer’s Reference Help file on the L4400 Product
Reference CD- ROM for details).
CONF:DIG:HAND SYNC, 2.5, 2.5, NORM, (@1201)
You can set parameters by using a sequence of commands instead of the
CONFigure macro command. For example, the following command sequence
sets the handshaking mode to synchronous, the output drive to open collector,
and the handshake rate to 1 MHz.
CONF:DIG:HAND:MODE SYNC, (@1101)
CONF:DIG:HAND:DRIV OCOL, (@1101)
CONF:DIG:HAND:RATE 1000000, (@1101)
Setting the Handshake Line Parameters
You can set the handshake lines’ input threshold, output drive mode, and
output drive voltage. These settings affect all the handshake lines in the bank.
Handshake line polarity can be set for each individual handshake line.
For example, you can invert the polarity of the handshake line H1 on
bank 2 with the following command.
CONF:DIG:HAND:POL INV, H1, (@1201)
You can set the output drive mode, output voltage, and input threshold for all
handshake lines in each bank. For example, the following commands set the
drive mode to active, the drive voltage to 4.5 V, and the input threshold to 1.0 V
on bank 2.
CONF:DIG:HAND:DRIV ACT, (@1201)
SOUR:DIG:HAND:LEV 4.5, (@1201)
SENS:DIG:HAND:THR 1, (@1202)
The settings for drive mode, output drive level, and input threshold also
apply to the bank’s interrupt line.
NOTE
When using external pull-ups in the open collector mode, the outputs will
not exceed 5 V.
NOTE
204
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
Synchronous Handshake Mode
In the synchronous handshake mode, a strobe or clock signal is used to
transfer data to or from an external device. The strobe line (H1) is an output
and is pulsed once for each transfer.
Synchronous Unbuffered Inputs For synchronous handshake unbuffered inputs
the H0 line indicates the direction of the transfer. This line is set high to
indicate an input operation. The H0 line will remain in the high state until the
L4450A direction is changed. The H1 line is the strobe output line. The H2 line
is not used and is set to high impedance.
The timing of the input operation is controlled by the T
parameter set
CYCLE
using the CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:RATE command. This setting
affects strobe width, memory clock rate, as well as the setup and hold times.
Alternatively, the reciprocal form of the command
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:CTIMe can be used to specify the speed in
terms of time instead of a rate. T
of the input commands.
begins when the L4450A executes one
CYCLE
The timing should be set such that the device sending the data ensures the
data lines are valid prior to T time. The trailing edge of the strobe line
SETUP
indicates the L4450A will latch the data within the T
time. T
is 90 ns
HOLD
SETUP
and T
is 0 ns. Since T
= 0 ns, the sending device can use the trailing
HOLD
HOLD
edge of the strobe to initiate a change in the data lines.
A synchronous unbuffered input is shown in the diagram below
(default handshake line polarity).
H0 (Direction)
TCYCLE
TCYCLE / 2
TCYCLE / 2
H1 (Strobe)
Data In
TSETUP
Valid
THOLD
Don't-Care
Don't-Care
For example, the following SCPI commands set the L4450A to have a 16- bit
input using synchronous handshake. Two data inputs are then performed and
the strobe line is pulsed for each query. The I/O direction line is set high
following the first SENSe:DIGital:DATA:WORD? query and remains high until
the digital channel is reset or reconfigured.
CONF:DIG:WIDT WORD, (@1101)
CONF:DIG:DIR INP, (@1101)
CONF:DIG:HAND SYNC, (@1101)
SENS:DIG:DATA:WORD? (@1101)
SENS:DIG:DATA:WORD? (@1101)
L4400 User’s Guide
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
Synchronous Unbuffered Outputs For synchronous handshake unbuffered
outputs, the H0 line indicates the direction of the transfer. This line is set low
to indicate an output operation. The H0 line will remain in the low state until
the L4450A direction is changed. The H1 line is the strobe output line.
When the L4450A executes an output command, it sets the data lines and
waits for T
/2 before asserting the strobe line. The leading edge of the
CYCLE
strobe indicates the data is valid. The strobe line is asserted for T
/2 and
CYCLE
then de- asserted. The H2 line is not used and is set to high impedance.
The timing of the output operation is controlled by the T parameter set
CYCLE
using the CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:RATE command. This setting
affects strobe width, memory clock rate, as well as the setup and hold times.
Alternatively, the reciprocal form of the command
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:CTIMe can be used to specify the speed in
terms of time instead of a rate. The timing should be set such that the device
receiving the data can read the data lines during the T
/2 time.
CYCLE
A synchronous unbuffered output is shown in the diagram below (default
handshake line polarity).
H0 (Direction)
Data Out
Invalid
Valid
TCYCLE
TCYCLE / 2
TCYCLE / 2
H1 (Strobe)
For example, the following SCPI commands set the L4450A to have a 16- bit
output using synchronous handshake. Two data outputs are then performed
and the strobe line is pulsed for each. The I/O direction line is set low following
the first SOURce:DIGital:DATA:WORD command and remains low until the
digital channel is reset of reconfigured.
CONF:DIG:WIDT WORD, (@1101)
CONF:DIG:DIR OUTP, (@1101)
CONF:DIG:HAND SYNC, (@1101)
SOUR:DIG:DATA:WORD #hFFFF, (@1101)
SOUR:DIG:DATA:WORD #h4DB5, (@1101)
206
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
Synchronous Buffered Inputs You can use synchronous mode handshake with
buffered (memory) input operations. (Buffered operations are described in
line acts as a start/stop line. This line will be set high when the memory
input command is executed and will return low when the memory input
operation has completed. The H1 line is not used and is set to high
impedance.
An external strobe input on the H2 line controls the pace of memory transfers.
The sending device must ensure the data is valid before the T
and stays
SETUP
valid until after T
55 ns.
. T
is 30 ns and T
is
HOLD
SETUP
HOLD
A synchronous buffered input using an external clock is shown in the diagram
below (default handshake line polarity).
H0 (Start/
Stop)
> 50 ns
TCYCLE 100 ns
>
(Last Cycle)
H2 (Strobe In)
TSETUP THOLD
Valid
TSETUP THOLD
Valid
Don't-Care
Don't-Care
Don't-Care
Valid
Don't-Care
Data In
For example, the following SCPI commands set the L4450A to have an 8- bit
input using synchronous handshake with an external strobe input. The
number of bytes to read into memory is set to infinite (continuous reading into
memory until the memory is stopped). The memory is enabled and then
triggered. The start/stop line is set high following the first byte handshake and
remains high until the last byte is captured.
CONF:DIG:WIDT BYTE, (@1101)
CONF:DIG:DIR INP, (@1101)
CONF:DIG:HAND SYNC, (@1101)
SENS:DIG:MEM:SAMP:COUN 0, (@1101)
SENS:DIG:MEM:ENAB ON, (@1101)
SENS:DIG:MEM:STAR (@1101)
L4400 User’s Guide
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
Synchronous Buffered Outputs You can use synchronous mode handshake with
buffered (memory) output operations. (Buffered operations are described in
H0 line acts as a start/stop line. This line will be set high when the
memory output command is executed by the L4450A and will return low
when the memory output operation has completed.
Synchronous memory output operations can be paced using either the
internal strobe or an external strobe.
When using the internal strobe, the H1 line is the strobe output line.
The timing of the output operation when using the default INTernal clock is
controlled by the CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:RATE command.
This setting affects strobe width, memory clock rate, as well as the setup and
hold times. Alternatively, the reciprocal form of the command
CONFigure:DIGital:HANDshake:CTIMe can be used to specify the speed in
terms of time instead of a rate. The timing should be set such that the device
receiving the data can latch the data lines during the T
time.
CYCLE
The receiving device should detect the leading edge of the strobe line, wait for
the L4450A to set the data (T ) and then latch the data. Latching the data on
PD
the trailing edge of the strobe is recommended, however, you can the data
following T . T
ranges from - 23 to 23 ns.
PD
PD
A synchronous buffered output using the internal clock is shown in the
diagram below (default handshake line polarity).
H0 (Start/Stop)
H1 (Strobe Out)
Data Out
TCYCLE / 2
TCYCLE
(Last Cycle)
TPD
TPD
TPD
Invalid
Valid
208
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
Optionally, you can provide an external strobe input on the H2 line to control
the memory transfers. If you pace the memory inputs from an external clock,
the L4450A will sense the leading edge of the strobe and set the data. The data
will be valid after T and the receiving device may latch the data. T ranges
PD
PD
from 140 ns to 60 ns. The maximum T
of 140 ns limits operation in this
PD
mode to 7 MHz.
A synchronous buffered output using an external clock is shown in the
diagram below (default handshake line polarity).
H0 (Start/Stop)
TCYCLE
(Last Cycle)
H2 (Clock In)
Data Out
TPD
TPD
TPD
Invalid
Valid
For example, using the internal strobe, the following SCPI commands set
the L4450A to have a 32- bit output using synchronous handshake. The number
of times to output the traces is set to 4. A trace is then loaded into memory and
assigned to the channel. The memory is enabled and then triggered. The
start/stop line is set high following the first byte handshake and remains high
until the last byte is output.
CONF:DIG:WIDT LWOR, (@1101)
CONF:DIG:DIR OUTP, (@1101)
CONF:DIG:HAND SYNC, (@1101)
SOUR:DIG:MEM:NCYC 4, (@1101)
TRAC:DATA:DIG:LWOR (@1101), mytrace, #hFFEEFFEE, #hBCBC9999
SOUR:DIG:MEM:TRAC mytrace,(@1101)
SOUR:DIG:MEM:ENAB ON, (@1101)
SOUR:DIG:MEM:STAR (@1101)
Using an external strobe, the following SCPI commands set the L4450A to
have an 8- bit output using synchronous handshake with an external strobe
input. The number of times to output the traces is set to infinite (continuous
output until the memory is stopped). The memory is enabled and then
triggered. The start/stop line is set high following the first byte handshake and
remains high until the last byte is output.
CONF:DIG:WIDT BYTE, (@1101)
CONF:DIG:DIR OUTP, (@1101)
CONF:DIG:HAND SYNC, (@1101)
CONF:DIG:HAND:SYNC:STR:SOUR EXT, (@1101)
SOUR:DIG:MEM:NCYC 0, (@1101)
TRAC:DATA:DIG:BYTE (@1101), mytrace, 260, 139
SOUR:DIG:MEM:TRAC mytrace,(@1101)
SOUR:DIG:MEM:ENAB ON, (@1101)
SOUR:DIG:MEM:STAR (@1101)
L4400 User’s Guide
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
Buffered I/O Operations
Each of the two banks on the L4450A has its own memory that can be used to
store patterns to output (traces) or to store input patterns. The width of the
first channel in each bank controls the width of the memory operations.
Memory may be used as:
• 64K x 8 bits
• 64K x 16 bits
• 32K x 32 bits
Buffered (Memory) Output
Each bank on the L4450A has its own memory for use in buffered transfers.
Changing a bank from an input to an output will clear all memory for that
bank. For buffered outputs, you download “traces” of digital data to the
memory. Multiple traces (up to 32) can be downloaded into each bank. A
specified trace is then output using the handshaking parameters set.
The general steps to output from memory are:
1 Set the channel width and direction.
2 Set the handshake mode.
3 Set the trigger source.
4 Set the number of times to output the trace.
5 Load the trace(s) into memory.
6 Set which trace to use.
7 Enable the memory.
8 Trigger the output.
Set the channel width and direction. Use the SOURce:DIGital:DATA command
to set the channel width and set the channel as an output. Additionally, the
data specified in the command will be the initial state of the data lines before
the memory operation begins.
Set the handshake mode. You must use synchronous handshaking mode.
You can use either an internal or external strobe (clock) to pace the outputs.
Set the trigger source. By default, the trigger source is set to use a software
a trigger source.
210
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
Set the number of times to output the trace. Each trace can be output once,
multiple times, or infinitely. The SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:NCYClescommand
sets the number of times to output the trace. If not set to infinite, you can
output the trace from 1 to 255 times (the output is controlled by the
handshake).
Load the trace(s) into memory. Named traces are downloaded using the
TRACe:DATA:DIGital command. The channel width used should match the
width of the channel set in step 1. If you change the width of a bank,
all traces in memory are cleared. The trace names must start with a character
and may be up to 12 characters in length. The trace name used must be unique
to the bank. Up to 32 traces may be downloaded.
Traces can be added or deleted only when memory is disabled. Memory output
cannot be enabled unless the bank has a trace assigned to it.
For example, the following commands load two traces into memory for bank 1.
In this example, each byte of the LWORd to output is sent as a separate byte.
TRAC:DATA:DIG:LWOR (@1101), MyTrace1, 255, 200, 128, 0
TRAC:DATA:DIG:LWOR (@1101), MyTrace2, 254, 192, 64, 32
You can also send trace data in IEEE-488 block format using this command.
The L4450A also has two special built- in traces for your use. You can generate
and download a count- up trace and a walking 1’s pattern using the
TRACe:DATA:DIGital:FUNCtion command. See the Programmer's Reference
Help file on the L4400 Product Reference CD- ROM for more details.
You can generate a count-down or walking zero pattern by inverting the
data line polarity.
NOTE
Set which trace to use. The SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:TRACe command
assigns the desired trace to the bank. This command allows you to switch
between the traces pre- loaded into the bank’s memory.
Enable the memory. Enable the memory on the bank using the
SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:ENABle command. This command sets the selected
trace to be the output and puts the bank in the wait- for-trigger state.
Trigger the output. When the default trigger source is used, the
SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:STARt command triggers the output. The selected
trace will be output when the handshake occurs.
If the trigger source has been set to one of the interrupt lines (see page
page 213), the output will wait for the interrupt to occur and then the
handshake to occur before the trace is output.
L4400 User’s Guide
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
You can also output the trace one sample at a time on the data lines using the
SOURce:DIGital:MEMory:STEPcommand. This command outputs one sample
and then puts the memory in the stopped state. The STEP command also
overrides the interrupt line so it can be used to trigger a transfer even if the
interrupt line is set to be the trigger source.
Deleting Traces
You can delete traces in memory to recover the memory space. Use the
TRACe:DELete:NAMEcommand to delete a specific trace. Note that deleting a
specific trace does not de- fragment the memory. You can delete all traces using
the TRACe:DELete:ALL command.
Buffered (Memory) Input
Each bank on the L4450A has its own memory for use in buffered transfers.
Changing a bank from an output to an input will clear all memory for that
bank. The general steps to use input memory are:
1 Set the channel width and parameters.
2 Set the handshake mode.
3 Set the number of samples to collect.
4 Start the capture.
5 Check the status of the transfer.
6 Retrieve the captured data.
Set the channel width and direction. Use the CONFigure:DIGitalcommand to
basic input operations.
Set the handshake mode. You must use synchronous handshaking mode.
Set the number of samples to collect. The SENSe:DIGital:MEMory:SAMPle:COUNt
command sets the number of samples to capture. If you set the number of
counts to infinite (0 = default), the bank will capture data until a STOP is
received. Older samples are overwritten if memory gets full. Allowed sample
counts depend upon the channel width as follows:
• BYTE (8- bit) 1 to 65535
• WORD (16-bit) 1 to 65535
• LWORd (32- bit) 1 to 32767
Start the capture. The SENSe:DIGital:MEMory:STARt command sets the
channel to begin the data capture. The capture begins when the handshake
occurs.
212
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
Check the status of the transfer. You can use the
SENSe:DIGital:MEMory:DATA:POINts? query to return the number of
samples currently in memory.
Retrieve the captured data. Set the desired memory retrieval format using the
SENSe:DIGital:DATA:FORMat command. You can set the memory to be read
as either LIST or BLOCk. The LIST parameter (default) returns the data as
comma separated ASCII values. BLOCk returns the data in IEEE- 488 block
format.
Before you can read the data in memory, you must stop the memory
operations using the SENSe:DIGital:MEMory:ENABle OFF command.
Read all the captured data using the SENSe:DIGital:MEMory:DATA:ALL?
query. This performs a non- destructive read of all data in the bank’s memory.
To read specific captures, use the SENSe:DIGital:MEMory:DATA?form of the
command. This command takes index and count parameters to specify which
data to retrieve. The oldest data in memory has an index of ‘0’. The count
specifies the number of samples to read. count + index must be less than the
number of captured points.
Both these data reads are non- destructive to the bank memory. To clear the
memory for new data, send the SENSe:DIGital:MEMory:CLEar command.
Interrupt Lines
Each bank has an interrupt line that can be used with memory input or output
operations. When a bank is set to input data, the interrupt line is an output.
When a bank is set to output data, the interrupt line is set to be an input. You
can set the polarity of the interrupt line for input and output operations using
the CONFigure:DIGital:INTerrupt:POLarity command.
You can configure the interrupt line drive mode, output drive level, and input
threshold. These parameters are set for both the handshake lines and
parameters.
Memory Output Operations
For memory output operations, the interrupt line is sensed and can be used to
start or stop memory output operations. This provides a hardware means to
control the data output.
The SOURce:DIGital:INTerrupt:MODE command sets how the bank will
behave when using memory output. The mode can be set to one of three values:
• STARt: The memory output will begin on the rising edge of the interrupt
line.
L4400 User’s Guide
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
• STOP: The memory output is halted on the rising edge of the
interrupt line.
• GATE: The interrupt line acts a a gate for the memory output. The bank can
output when the interrupt line is asserted, and will stop when the interrupt
line is de- asserted.
When you have set the polarity and mode, enable the interrupt using the
SOURce:DIGital:INTerrupt:ENABle command.
Memory Input Operations
For memory input operations, the interrupt line is an output and is set on a
pattern match or when the memory has been filled. You can set the interrupt
line to be driven or open collector using the
SENSe:DIGital:HANDshake:DRIVe command.
The settings for drive mode, output drive level, and input threshold also
apply to the bank’s handshake lines.
NOTE
When set to ACTive the interrupt line will be driven by the instrument. The
high output voltage is set for both the handshaking and interrupt line on a
bank with the SOURce:DIGital:HANDshake:LEVel command.
When set to OCOLlector the interrupt line will be driven low, but will go to
high impedance mode when in the ‘High’ state. The open collector mode
requires external pull-ups.
The SENSe:DIGital:INTerrupt:MODE command sets the condition that will
cause the interrupt to be asserted. When set to MFULl the interrupt is given
when the memory is full. When set to COMParethe interrupt is asserted when
removed, the interrupt is de- asserted.
The interrupt line is enabled by the SENSe:DIGital:INTerrupt:ENABle
command and the status can be checked using the SCPI Status System (refer to
the Programmer's Reference Help file on the L4400 Product Reference
CD- ROM).
Byte Ordering
When using buffered memory operations, the width of the data sets how the
memory data is interpreted. Changing the width of the first channel in a bank
invalidates any traces stored or captured.
into memory using the TRACe:DATA:DIGital command.
214
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
For output operations, the data stored in memory is output as follows:
• BYTE output - first byte in memory on the first handshake, next byte in
memory on the second handshake, and so on.
• WORDoutput - first and second byte in memory on the first handshake, next
two bytes in memory on the second handshake, and so on.
• LWORdoutput - first four bytes in memory on the first handshake, next four
bytes in memory on the second handshake, and so on.
Note that for WORD outputs the first byte in memory is considered the most
significant byte and is output on the upper bits (15 through 8). For LWORd
outputs the first byte is output on bits 31 through 24.
You can change the byte order reported using the FORMat:BORDercommand.
This command allows you to swap the most- significant and least-significant
byte ordering for all data transfer operations. The command is applied globally
and cannot be assigned to an individual slot or channel.
into memory as follows:
• BYTEinput - the first byte in memory was read on the first handshake, the
next byte in memory was read on the second handshake, and so on.
• WORD input - first and second byte in memory were read on the first
handshake, next two bytes in memory were read on the second handshake,
and so on.
• LWORdinput - first four bytes in memory were read on the first handshake,
next four bytes in memory were read on the second handshake, and so on.
Note that for WORD inputs the first byte in memory is considered the most
significant byte and was read on the upper bits (15 through 8). For LWORd
inputs the first byte was read on bits 31 through 24.
Pattern Matching
Pattern matching can be used on input channels only. Pattern matching can be
done with or without handshaking. When a pattern match occurs, the L4450A
can set an interrupt line or system alarm. A pattern match can also be used to
start or stop a buffered (memory) transfer.
Pattern matching is done on a per bank basis and always starts at the first
channel of a bank and works up to encompass the configured width of the
channel.
Patterns are set up and enabled using the CALCulate subsystem of SCPI
commands. For example, the following commands set up a pattern match
(#HF00F) and assert the interrupt line when the input pattern is equal to the
match pattern.
L4400 User’s Guide
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
CONF:DIG:WIDT WORD, (@1101)
CALC:COMP:DATA #HF00F, (@1101)
CALC:COMP:TYPE EQUAL, (@1101)
SENS:DIG:INT:MODE COMP, (@1101)
SENS:DIG:INT:ENAB ON, (@1101)
CALC:COMP:STAT ON, (@1101)
Once the pattern matching state is turned on, the L4450A polls for the pattern
#HF00F to appear on the data lines of channel 101. The interrupt line will be
asserted when the pattern is matched. In the example above the last command,
CALCulate:COMPare:STATe, also sets the mainframe alarm on a pattern
match.
You can use pattern matching to start or stop a buffered (memory) input
transfer. When the desired pattern is found, the L4450A can be set to start or
stop a capture.
For example, the following commands establish a byte pattern match on
channels 101 and 201. When the pattern is found, 200 samples are captured.
CONF:DIG:WIDTH BYTE,(@1101,1201)
CALC:COMP:DATA:BYTE 140,(@1101,1201)
CALC:COMP:STAT ON,(@1101,1201)
DIG:MEM:SAMP:COUN 200,(@1101,1201)
DIG:MEM:COMP:ACT STAR,(@1101,1201)
DIG:MEM:ENAB ON,(@1101,1201)
Counter
The L4450A has two 10 MHz frequency counter/totalizer measurement input
channels. The counters can operate in two general modes: Totalizer mode, and
Initiated Measurement mode. In the totalizer mode, the counter acts as a basic
totalizer. In the initiated measurement mode, the counter can make frequency,
period, duty cycle, and pulse width measurements.
Totalizer Mode
Totalizer mode is the default operating mode for the counters. When the
counter is configured for TOTalizer mode, it automatically starts running.
The totalized count can be read, reset, scanned, and monitored.
The simplest way to take a totalizer measurement is to use the MEASureform
of the command. For example, the following command configures the totalizer
on the first bank, initiates the measurement, and returns the result. The data
is returned in a floating point format.
MEAS:COUN:TOT? READ, (@1301)
You can also reset the totalizer count by setting the parameter to RRESet. For
example, the following command configures the totalizer on the first bank,
initiates the measurement, and returns the result. The totalize count is reset
when the data is read.
216
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
MEAS:COUN:TOT? RRES, (@1301)
Totalizer counts begin as soon as the channel is configured for the totalize
measurement. You can stop a count by sending SENSe:COUNter:ABORt
command and restart the count using the SENSe:COUNter:INITiate
command.
The slope of the edges being counted can be configured using the
SENSe:COUNter:SLOPe command. By default, when started, the totalizer
counts rising edges.
Additionally, you can control when the edges are counted by setting the gate
source to external and providing a gate signal on the gate input.
In external gate mode the counter totalizes when the gate is asserted.
The gate time setting controls how long the counter totalizes. Once the
external gate has been de- asserted a new measurement must be armed via the
SENSe:COUNter:INITiate command. The figure below shows an externally
gated totalizer measurement. The number of totalized counts is ‘5’ in this
particular example.
Ext Gate
Input
Init
Initiated Measurement Mode
Measurements such as frequency, period, duty cycle, and pulse width require
an initiate command and a gate. The SENSe:COUNter:INITiate command is
used to initiate (arm) the measurement. The measurement is gated by either
an internal (default) or external gate source. For measurements the external
gate acts like an external trigger which triggers the internal gate timer.
The gate source is set using the SENSe:COUNter:SOURce command.
The default gate source is INTernal. The gate is the aperture over which the
signal data is gathered. When the gate is internal, the measurement begins as
soon as the INITiate command is received.
Since the measurements are all derived from the same basic measurement, you
can retrieve the measured frequency, period, duty- cycle, and pulse width from
the same initiated and gated measurement. For example, the following
commands set the counter to measure the input signal for 1 ms using the
internal gate. The frequency, period, duty cycle, and pulse width are returned
as floating point numbers.
L4400 User’s Guide
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
CONF:COUN:FREQ 1e-3, (@1301)
SENS:COUN:INIT (@1301)
SENS:COUN:FREQ? (@1301)
SENS:COUN:PER? (@1301)
SENS:COUN:PWID? (@1301)
SENS:COUN:DCYC? (@1301)
The CONFigure:COUNter:FREQuency command parameter sets the internal
gate time (to 1e-3 or 1 ms in the above example). You can also set the gate time
using the SENSe:COUNter:GATE:TIME command.
Clock
The general- purpose clock output is derived from the internal time base. The
output clock is divided down from the time base clock such that:
Clock Output (Hz) = (time base frequency)/(divisor)
The time base frequency is 40 MHz. The divisor can be an integer from
6
2 to 4 providing a range of 20 MHz to 10 Hz for the clock output.
The valid values for the clock output rate are: 20 MHz, 13.33 MHz,
10 MHz, 8 MHz, 6.667 MHz, ... 10Hz. The clock output frequency will round to
the nearest achievable frequency.
The commands used to control the clock output are:
SOUR:MOD:CLOC:FREQ {<freq>|MIN|MAX|DEF},<slot>
SOUR:MOD:CLOC {OFF|ON|0|1},<slot>
You can obtain the rounded value of the currently set clock frequency using
the following query.
SOUR:MOD:CLOC:FREQ?
You can also set the logic “high” voltage level for external clock output.
For example, the following command sets the output clock level to 4.5 V.
SOUR:MOD:CLOC:LEV 4.5, 1
L4450A D-Sub Connectors
The L4450A uses two D- sub 78- pin female connectors. Each connector
provides contains one bank of the module. As viewed from the rear panel, the
connectors and their banks are shown below.
P2 (Bank 2)
P1 (Bank 1)
218
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
As viewed from the rear panel, the pins in each connector are numbered as
shown below.
16
15
7
19
17
13
12
11
10
9
8
6
4
2
20
18
5
3
1
14
38
30
29
28
24
37
36
33
26
23
22
31
27
25
21
34
32
39
35
56
54
53
51
49
44
43
48
47
46
45
41
55
50
42
40
59
58
57
52
64
78
75
70
69
67
66
65
63
60
77
76
74
73
72
71
68
62
61
P1 (Bank 1) Connector Pin Assignments
Pin
1
Signal
GND
CNTR
GND
GATE
GND
INTR
GND
H2
Pin
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Signal
GND
27
Pin
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Signal
18
Pin
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
Signal
8
C
H
3
0
1
CH102
C
H
1
0
4
2
GND
17
GND
NC
GND
7
C
H
1
0
3
3
GND
26
4
GND
16
5
GND
25
6
GND
15
GND
6
7
GND
24
8
GND
14
GND
5
C
H
1
0
1
9
GND
H1
GND
23
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
GND
13
GND
4
C
H
1
0
2
C
H
1
0
3
GND
H0
GND
22
GND
12
GND
3
GND
31
GND
21
GND
11
GND
2
C
H
1
0
4
GND
30
GND
20
GND
10
GND
1
GND
29
GND
19
GND
9
GND
0
GND
28
GND
GND
L4400 User’s Guide
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
P2 (Bank 2) Connector Pin Assignments
Pin
1
Signal
GND
CNTR
GND
GATE
GND
INTR
GND
H2
Pin
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Signal
GND
27
Pin
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Signal
18
Pin
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
Signal
8
C
H
3
0
2
CH202
2
GND
17
GND
CLK
GND
7
C
H
2
0
4
C
H
2
0
3
3
GND
26
4
GND
16
5
GND
25
6
GND
15
GND
6
7
GND
24
8
GND
14
GND
5
C
H
2
0
1
9
GND
H1
GND
23
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
GND
13
GND
4
GND
H0
GND
22
GND
12
GND
3
C
H
2
0
2
C
H
2
0
3
GND
31
GND
21
GND
11
GND
2
C
H
2
0
4
GND
30
GND
20
GND
10
GND
1
GND
29
GND
19
GND
9
GND
0
GND
28
GND
GND
220
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
8
34950T Terminal Block
The optional 34950T terminal block has screw type connections and the
terminal are labeled with the channel and bit information.
L4450A Terminal Block.
L4400 User’s Guide
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
L4450A 64-Bit Digital I/O with Memory and Counter
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
222
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
L4451A 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter with Waveform Memory
L4451A 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter with Waveform Memory
The L4451A 4- Ch Isolated D/A module (DAC module) has four independent,
isolated DAC channels that output DC voltage up to 16V or DC current up to
20 mA. Since the DACs are electrically isolated, you can stack or combine
multiple DACs to have up to 64 V on a module. You can control each channel
manually, or use the onboard memory to store multiple sequenced points.
Level Output Mode
The module can generate voltages between - 16 V DC and +16 V DC at 500 µV
resolution on any channel. Each channel configured for voltage output has
hardware remote- sensing capability to ensure that an accurate voltage is
present at the load. With the remote sensing feature, the DAC channel
outputs an additional voltage to compensate for the voltage drop in the test
leads. Thus, using the sense connections, the load voltage equals the
programmed voltage as long as the resistance in each sense lead is less than
2.5Ω and the maximum voltage drop in the output leads is 0.5 volts.
To ensure that an accurate voltage is present at the loads, it is
NOTE
recommended that you use remote-sensing. However, if
remote-sensing is not used, do not connect loads or cables to the
remote-sensing terminals (H Sense and L Sense).
When using the remote- sensing feature, connect sense wires from the load to
the High Sense and Low Sense terminals for the desired channels.
Each channel can also generate current between - 20 mA and +20 mA at
630 nA resolution. When outputting current the High Sense and Low Sense
terminals are not used and are opened. For protection, each channel
incorporates a fuse that will open at greater than 20 mA. If an overload
condition exists, the fuse will open, but no error or SRQ will be generated. To
reset the fuse, remove the overload condition and wait a few minutes for the
fuse to cool.
Waveform (Trace) Mode
Using the internal waveform point storage, you can output provided sine,
square, or ramp and triangle wave shapes, or define your own wave shape
with up to 512,000 points. The module can output points with a settling time
of 40 µs and a 200 kHz point- to- point update rate.
224
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4451A 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter with Waveform Memory
9
The on- board memory provides storage for you to create up to 32 voltage or
current waveforms. You can apply a different waveform to each channel to
output. Or you can apply the same waveform to more than one channel. For
each channel you can designate the gain, frequency, and/or offset for its
output.
The waveforms are stored in instrument memory. Therefore, whenever
power is cycled, the volatile memory empties of data it has contained.
The waveform feature of the L4451A is not intended as a full- featured
substitute for a function generator, but as a means of storing point- to- point
updates.
Clock In
You can configure each DAC channel on the instrument to synchronize off
either an internally- generated 20 MHz clock or the positive edge of an
external user-supplied clock.
An external clock must be less than 10 MHz or indeterminate behavior will
result. Additionally, the maximum point-to- point update rate of the DACs is
200 kHz. If you configure a DAC to run off an external clock, you will need to
ensure that the correct clock divisor is also configured for that DAC. For
example, if you supply a 10 MHz external clock, the minimum clock divisor is
50 because the maximum update rate is 200 kHz. If a clock divisor less than
the minimum is configured, indeterminate behavior will results. Thresholds
for the external clock input are 5 V TTL tolerant.
Clock Out
There is one clock output on the DAC module, which you can configure to
output at frequencies up to 10 MHz. Since it uses a 16- bit clock divisor, the
16
available output frequencies range in steps of 20 MHz/2 with a minimum
output frequency of 305 Hz. The output impedance of the Clock Out is 50 Ω.
The line between external Clock Out and external Clock In is shared.
NOTE
You can use the external Clock Out to provide the external Clock In
signal. However, both a user-supplied external clock and the
module’s Clock Out cannot drive the line at the same time.
Trigger In
You can configure each DAC on the module to trigger off an externally
provided ‘Trigger In’ that has a pulse width greater than 100 ns. The Trigger
In line is 5V TTL tolerant.
Trigger Out
The DAC module can source a TTL level Trigger Out. Trigger Out has a pulse
width between 5 and 10 µs.
L4400 User’s Guide
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
L4451A 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter with Waveform Memory
The line between external Trigger Out and external Trigger In is
NOTE
shared. You can use the external Trigger Out to provide the external
Trigger In signal. However, both a user-supplied external trigger and
the L4451A Trigger Out cannot drive the line at the same time.
L4451A SCPI Command Summary
Table 9-1 lists the instrument-specific SCPI commands that apply to the
L4451A 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter instrument. Table 3-3 (Chapter 3)
lists the SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments.
For complete information on all SCPI commands, refer to the Programmer’s
Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD-ROM (p/n
34989-13601).
Table 9-1. L4451A SCPI Command Summary.
Commands
Subsystem
SOURce
(DAC
Configuration)
SOURce:CURRent[:LEVel] {<current>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:CURRent[:LEVel]? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:TRIGger:SOURce {IMMediate|MANual|EXTernal},
(@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:TRIGger:SOURce? (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:MODE {VOLTage|CURRent}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:MODE? (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:FREQuency {<frequency>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, 1
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:FREQuency? [{MIN|MAX}, ] 1
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:STATe {OFF|0|ON|1}, 1
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:STATe? 1
SOURce:MODule:TRIGger:EXTernal:IMMediate 1
SOURce:MODule:TRIGger:OUTPut {OFF|0|ON|1}, 1
SOURce:MODule:TRIGger:OUTPut? 1
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel] {<voltage>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel]? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:CLOCk:EXTernal:DIVisor {<value>|MIN|MAX|DEF},
(@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:CLOCk:EXTernal:DIVisor? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:CLOCk:SOURce {INTernal|EXTernal|STEP}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:CLOCk:SOURce? (@<ch_list>)
(Trace
Waveform
Configuration)
SOURce:FUNCtion:CURRent:GAIN {<gain>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:CURRent:GAIN? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
226
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4451A 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter with Waveform Memory
9
SOURce:FUNCtion:CURRent:OFFSet {<offset>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:CURRent:OFFSet? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:ENABle {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:ENABle? (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:FREQuency {<frequency>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:FREQuency? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:HALT (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:SAMPle:PERiod {<period>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:SAMPle:PERiod? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:TRACe:NCYCles {<count>|MIN|MAX|DEF|INFinity},
(@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:TRACe:NCYCles? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:TRACe:SINDex <point>, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:TRACe:SINDex? (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:TRACe[:NAME] <name>, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:TRACe[:NAME]? (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:TRIGger:IMMediate (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:VOLTage:GAIN {<gain>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:VOLTage:GAIN? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:VOLTage:OFFSet {<offset>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:FUNCtion:VOLTage:OFFSet? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:FREQuency {<frequency>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, 1
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:FREQuency? [{MIN|MAX}, ] 1
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:LEVel {<voltage>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, 1
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:LEVel? [{MIN|MAX}, ] 1
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:STATe {OFF|0|ON|1}, 1
SOURce:MODule:CLOCk:STATe? 1
(External
Clock Output)
OUTPut[:STATe] {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
OUTPut[:STATe]? (@<ch_list>)
OUTPut
(DAC
Configuration)
TRACe:CATalog? {(@<channel>)|1}
TRACe:DELete:ALL {(@<channel>)|1}
TRACe
(Trace
TRACe:DELete[:NAME] {(@<channel>)|1}, <name>
TRACe:FREE? {(@<channel>)|1}
TRACe:POINts? {(@<channel>)|1}, <name>
Waveform
Configuration)
TRACe[:DATA] 1, <name>, {<binary_block>|<value>, <value> [,<value>, ...]}
TRACe[:DATA]:DAC 1, <name>, {<binary_block>|<value>, <value> [,<value>, ...]}
TRACe[:DATA]:FUNCtion 1, <type>, <name>, <points>
ROUTe
(Channel
Labeling)
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel:CLEar:MODule 1
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel[:DEFine] "<label>" , (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel[:DEFine]? [<type>,] (@<ch_list>)
L4400 User’s Guide
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
L4451A 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter with Waveform Memory
ROUTe:SEQuence:CATalog?
(Sequence
Operation)
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine <name>, "<commands>"
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine? <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete:ALL
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete[:NAME] <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:DONE?
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger[:IMMediate] <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce <name>, MANual
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce? <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:WAIT
L4451A Example Program Segments
The programming examples below provide you with SCPI command
examples to use for actions specific to the DAC module.
The slot and channel addressing scheme used in these examples follow
the form 1ccc where ccc is the three-digit channel number. Valid channels for
this module are 001- 004. For information on specific configurations, refer to
For detailed example programs involving multiple drivers and development
environments, refer to the L4400 Product Reference CD- ROM (p/n
34989- 13601).
Level Mode
Example: Outputting a DC voltage level This command sets the output voltage
level for the specified DAC channels. After setting the desired level, send the
OUTPut:STATe command to close the corresponding output relay and
enable outputs from the specified channels. The following command outputs
+2.5 V DC on DAC channels 1 and 2.
SOURce:VOLTage 2.5,(@1001,1002)
OUTPut:STATe ON,(@1001,1002)
Example: Outputting a current level This command sets the output current
level on the specified channels on the DAC module. After setting the desired
level, send the OUTPut:STATe command to close the corresponding output
relay and enable outputs from the specified channels. The following
command outputs +5 mA on DAC channels 1 and 2 and closes the output
relay.
SOURce:CURRent 5E-3,(@1001,1002)
OUTPut:STATe ON,(@1001,1002)
228
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4451A 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter with Waveform Memory
9
Waveform Mode
Example: Downloading a waveform to memory and outputting waveform from
DACs The following command segment downloads a 1000- point sine
waveform to memory and outputs the waveform from DAC channels 1 and 2.
The trace name is TEST_SINE.
TRACe:FUNCtion 1,SINusoid, TEST_SINE, 1000
SOURce:FUNCtion:TRACe TEST_SINE,(@1001,1002)
OUTPut:STATe ON,(@1001,1002)
SOURe:FUNCtion:ENABle ON,(@1001,1002)
Example: Downloading trace points to memory and outputting waveform from
DACs
The following command segment downloads seven trace points to memory
and output the waveform from DAC channels 1 and 2. The trace name is
"NEG_RAMP".
TRACe:DATA 1,NEG_RAMP, 1, .67, .33, 0, -.33, -.67, -1
SOURce:FUNCtion:TRACe NEG_RAMP,(@1001,1002)
OUTPut:STATe ON,(@1001,1002)
SOURe:FUNCtion:ENABle ON,(@1001,1002)
Example: Setting the amplitude of a waveform for offset and gain
The following commands set the offset to 5.25 and the gain to 1.5 on DAC
channels 1 and 2.
SOURce:FUNCtion:VOLTage:OFFSet 5.25,(@1001,1002)
SOURce:FUNCtion:VOLTage:GAIN 1.5,(@1001,1002)
Example: Setting cycle count for a waveform The following command
segments turn off the trace output mode on DAC channels 1 and 2, set the
cycle count to 100, then turn the trace output mode back on.
SOURce:FUNCtion:ENABle OFF,(@1001,1002)
SOURce:FUNCtion:TRACe:NCYCles 100,(@1001,1002)
SOURce:FUNCtion:ENABle ON,(@1001,1002)
Example: Deleting a waveform The following command deletes the trace
named TEST_WFORM from the instrument.
TRACe:DELete 1,TEST_WFORM
L4400 User’s Guide
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
L4451A 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter with Waveform Memory
External Clock
Example: Selecting an external clock source and setting a clock divisor Thefirst
command selects the external clock source on DAC channels 1 and 2. The
external clock input is shared between these two channels. The second
command sets the clock divisor to 100 on the same DAC channels (the
external clock input signal is divided by 100).
SOURce:FUNCtion:CLOCk:SOURce EXTernal,(@1001,1002)
SOURce:FUNCtion:CLOCk:EXTernal:DIVisor 100,(@1001,1002)
Example: Outputting a clock The following commands set the clock output
frequency to 5 kHz and enable the output.
SOURce:MODule:CLOCK:FREQuency 5E+3,1
SOURce:MODule:CLOCK:STATE ON,1
External Trigger
Example: Selecting the external trigger source and issuing trigger source The
following command segment enables the trigger output mode and then
enables the external trigger source on DAC channels 1 and 2. The last
command issues an external trigger pulse from the module.
SOURce:MODule:TRIGger:OUTPut ON,1
SOURce:FUNCtion:TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal,(@1001,1002)
SOURce:MODule:TRIGger:EXTernal:IMMediate 1
Configuring a DAC Module
Example: Querying the system for module identify (all modules) The following
command returns the identify of the L4451A instrument.
SYSTem:CTYPe? 1
Example: Resetting the module(s) to power-on state The following command
resets the instrument.
SYST:CPON 1
Using this command will erase any downloaded waveforms.
NOTE
230
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4451A 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter with Waveform Memory
9
L4451A Simplified Block Diagrams
The following diagram shows how the module is generally configured.
User-Supplied Connections
Ext Clock Out
Enable
Ext Trig Out
Enable
Int Clock
Int Trig
Ext Clock In/Out
Ext Trig In/Out
16 Bits
16 Bits
16 Bits
16 Bits
DAC
1
Channel 001
Channel 002
Channel 003
Channel 004
DAC
2
DAC
3
DAC
4
For more detail on the internal configuration of each DAC channel,
see the next page.
L4400 User’s Guide
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
L4451A 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter with Waveform Memory
The following diagram shows individual DAC channel configuration.
All channels are configured the same.
User-Supplied Connections
Calibration Constant
(non-volatile memory)
HI Voltage Sense
DAC x
Immediate
Data
(1 of 4 Channels)
HI Voltage, + Current
16 Bits
Control Logic
25 mA Thermal Fuse
(resettable)
Internal
Clock
Waveform
Memory
LO Voltage, − Current
Internal
Trigger
LO Voltage Sense
Ext Clock In/Out
Ext Trig In/Out
L4451A D-Sub Connector Pinout
GND GND GND
GND NC 4 L 4H 3L
3H
6
NC 2L 2H GND NC 1L
1H GND
50-Pin D-Sub
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Female Connector
4L 4H
3L
3H
EXT
1L
GND GND Sense
1H
Sense
2L
2H
Sense Sense
27 28
GND Sense Sense Sense Sense GND CLK TRIG GND
GND
33
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
29
30
31
32
19
GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND
41
34
35
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
36
37
50
Description
1L
Socket
15
16
31
32
11
12
27
28
5
Description
3L Sense
3H Sense
4L
Socket Description
Socket
8
Description
GND
Socket
34
Description
GND
Socket
44
21
22
3
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
1H
9
GND
35
GND
45
1L Sense
1H Sense
2L
13
17
18
23
26
29
30
33
GND
36
GND
46
4H
4
GND
37
GND
47
4L Sense
4H Sense
19
20
GND
38
GND
48
2H
GND
39
GND
49
2L Sense
2H Sense
3L
External Clock 24
GND
40
GND
50
Trigger
GND
25
1
GND
41
No Connect
No Connect
No Connect
2
GND
42
10
3H
6
GND
7
GND
43
14
232
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
L4451A 4-Channel Isolated D/A Converter with Waveform Memory
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
234
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO, D/A, and Totalizer
L4452A Multifunction Module
The L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO, D/A, and Totalizer combines
four 8- bit ports of digital input/output, a 100 kHz totalizer, and two 12
volt earth-referenced analog outputs. You can include digital inputs and
totalizer input in a scan list. You can make connections via standard
50- pin D- sub cables or the optional 34952T terminal block.
Digital Input/Output
The Digital Input/Output (DIO) consists of four 8- bit ports with
TTL- compatible inputs and output. The open- drain outputs can sink up
to 400 mA. You can configure the DIO ports for 8, 16, or 32- bit
operations. The DIO channels are connected by internal 5 V pull-up
resistors when configured as inputs.
Totalizer Input
The 32- bit totalizer can count pulses up to 100 kHz. You can configure
the totalizer to count on the rising edge or falling edge of the input
signal. A TTL high signal applied to the Gate terminal enables counting
and a low signal disables counting. A TTL low signal applied to the
Not-Gate terminal enables counting and a high signal disables counting.
The totalizer counts only when both terminals are enabled.
When the gate is not connected, the gate terminal is pulled to the
NOTE
enabled state, effectively creating a “gate always” condition.
Analog Output (DAC)
The two analog outputs are capable of outputting voltages between 12
volts with 16 bits of resolution. Each DAC channel is capable of
driving/sinking 10 mA maximum current. You can use the two analog
outputs to source bias voltages to your DUT, to control your analog
programmable power supplies, or as set points for your control systems.
236
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO, D/A, and Totalizer 10
L4452A SCPI Command Summary
Table 10- 1 lists the instrument- specific SCPI commands that apply to the
L4452A Multifunction Module instrument. Table 3- 3 (Chapter 3) lists the
SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments.
For complete information on all SCPI commands, refer to the
Programmer’s Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference
CD- ROM (p/n 34989- 13601).
Table 10-1. L4452A SCPI Command Summary.
Commands
Subsystem
CONFigure
(Digital I/O)
CONFigure:DIGital {BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}, [<voltage>,]
[{NORMal|INVerted},] (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:DIRection {INPut|0|OUTPut|1}, (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:DIRection? (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:WIDTh {BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}, (@<ch_list>)
CONFigure:DIGital:WIDTh? (@<ch_list>)
MEASure:DIGital? {BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}, [<voltage>,]
[{NORMal|INVerted} , ] (@<ch_list>)
MEASure
(Digital I/O)
SENse
(Digital I/O)
[SENSe:]DIGital:DATA[:{BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}]? [{DECimal
|BINary|HEXadecimal|OCTal},] (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:DATA:BIT? <bit>, (@<ch_list>)
(Totalizer)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:CLEar:IMMediate (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:DATA? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:SLOPe {NEGative|POSitive}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:SLOPe? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:THReshold[:MODE] {AC|TTL}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:THReshold[:MODE]? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:TYPE {READ|RRESet}, (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]TOTalize:TYPE? (@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory:COMPare:ACTion {CONTinue|STARt|STOP},
(@<ch_list>)
[SENSe:]DIGital:MEMory:COMPare:ACTion? (@<ch_list>)
(Digital
Pattern
Compare)
L4400 User’s Guide
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO, D/A, and Totalizer
SOURce
(Digital I/O)
SOURce:DIGital:DATA[:{BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}] <data>, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:DATA[:{BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}]?
[{DECimal|BINary|HEXadecimal|OCTal},] (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:DATA:BIT {0|1}, <bit>, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:DIGital:DATA:BIT? <bit>, (@<ch_list>)
(DAC)
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel] {<voltage>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
SOURce:VOLTage[:LEVel]? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate
(Digital
Pattern
CALCulate:COMPare:DATA[:{BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}] <data>,
(@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:COMPare:DATA? (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:COMPare:MASK[:{BYTE|1|WORD|2|LWORd|4}] <data>,
(@<ch_list>)
Compare)
CALCulate:COMPare:MASK? (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:COMPare:STATe {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:COMPare:STATe? (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:COMPare:TYPE {EQUal|NEQual}, (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:COMPare:TYPE? (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer {<value>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer? [{MIN|MAX},] (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:STATe {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:LIMit:LOWer:STATe? (@<ch_list>)
(Alarm Limit)
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer {<value>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer? [{MIN|MAX},] (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:STATe {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
CALCulate:LIMit:UPPer:STATe? (@<ch_list>)
(Measurement
Statistics)
CALCulate:AVERage:AVERage? [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:AVERage:CLEar [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:AVERage:COUNt? [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:AVERage:MAXimum? [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:AVERage:MAXimum:TIME? [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:AVERage:MINimum? [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:AVERage:MINimum:TIME? [(@<ch_list>)]
CALCulate:AVERage:PTPeak? [(@<ch_list>)]
ROUTe
(Monitor)
ROUTe:MONitor:DATA?
ROUTe:MONitor:MODE {CHANnel|DMM}
ROUTe:MONitor:MODE?
ROUTe:MONitor:STATe {OFF|0|ON|1}
ROUTe:MONitor:STATe?
ROUTe:MONitor[:CHANnel] (@<channel>)
ROUTe:MONitor[:CHANnel]?
ROUTe:MONitor[:CHANnel]:ENABle {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:MONitor[:CHANnel]:ENABle? (@<ch_list>)
238
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO, D/A, and Totalizer 10
ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay {<seconds>|MIN|MAX|DEF}, (@<ch_list>)
(Scanning)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay? [{MIN|MAX}, ] (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay:AUTO {OFF|0|ON|1}, (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay:AUTO? (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:SCAN (@<scan_list>)
ROUTe:SCAN?
ROUTe:SCAN:ADD (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:SCAN:REMove (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:SCAN:ORDered {OFF|0|ON|1}
ROUTe:SCAN:ORDered?
ROUTe:SCAN:SIZE?
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel:CLEar:MODule 1
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel[:DEFine] "<label>" , (@<ch_list>)
ROUTe:CHANnel:LABel[:DEFine]? [{USER|FACTory},] (@<ch_list>)
(Channel
Labeling)
(Sequence
Operation)
ROUTe:SEQuence:CATalog?
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine <name>, "<commands>"
ROUTe:SEQuence:DEFine? <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete:ALL
ROUTe:SEQuence:DELete[:NAME] <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:DONE?
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger[:IMMediate] <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce <name>, {ALARm1|ALARm2|MANual}
ROUTe:SEQuence:TRIGger:SOURce? <name>
ROUTe:SEQuence:WAIT
FORMat:BORDer {NORMal|SWAPped}
FORMat:BORDer?
FORMat:READing:ALARm {OFF|0|ON|1}
FORMat:READing:ALARm?
FORMat
(Scanning)
FORMat:READing:CHANnel {OFF|0|ON|1}
FORMat:READing:CHANnel?
FORMat:READing:TIME {OFF|0|ON|1}
FORMat:READing:TIME?
FORMat:READing:TIME:TYPE {ABSolute|RELative}
FORMat:READing:TIME:TYPE?
FORMat:READing:UNIT {OFF|0|ON|1}
FORMat:READing:UNIT?
ABORt
INITitate
READ? [(@<ch_list>)]
General
Scanning
SWEep:COUNt {<count>|MIN|MAX|DEF}
SWEep:COUNt? [{MIN|MAX}]
SWEep
(Scanning)
L4400 User’s Guide
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO, D/A, and Totalizer
TRIGger
(Scanning)
TRIGger:COUNt {<count>|MIN|MAX|DEF|INFinity}
TRIGger:COUNt? [{MIN|MAX}]
TRIGger:SOURce {IMMediate|BUS|EXTernal|ALARm1|ALARm2|TIMer}
TRIGger:SOURce?
TRIGger:TIMer {<seconds>|MIN|MAX|DEF}
TRIGger:TIMer? [{MIN|MAX}]
(General)
*TRG
TRIGger:COUNt {<count>|MIN|MAX|DEF|INFinity}
TRIGger:COUNt? [{MIN|MAX}]
TRIGger:DELay {<seconds>|MIN|MAX}
TRIGger:DELay? [{MIN|MAX}]
TRIGger:DELay:AUTO {OFF|0|ON|1}
TRIGger:DELay:AUTO?
TRIGger:SOURce {IMMediate|BUS|EXTernal|TIMer}
TRIGger:SOURce?
TRIGger:SOURce:ALARm[:MODE] {SINGle|CONTinuous}
TRIGger:SOURce:ALARm[:MODE]?
TRIGger:TIMer {<seconds>|MIN|MAX|DEF}
TRIGger:TIMer? [{MIN|MAX}]
OUTPut:ALARm{1|2}:CLEar
OUTput
OUTPut:ALARm:CLEar:ALL
(Alarm Limit)
OUTPut:ALARm:MODE {LATCh|TRACk}
OUTPut:ALARm:MODE?
OUTPut:ALARm{1|2}:SEQuence?
OUTPut:ALARm:SLOPe {NEGative|POSitive}
OUTPut:ALARm:SLOPe?
OUTPut:ALARm{1|2}:SOURce (@<ch_list>)
OUTPut:ALARm{1|2}:SOURce?
DATA:POINts:EVENt:THReshold <num_readings>
DATA:POINts:EVENt:THReshold?
DATA:POINts?
DATA:REMove? <num_readings>
FETCh?
DATA
(Reading
Memory)
R? [<max_count>]
SYSTem:TIME:SCAN?
(Measurement
Statics)
DATA:LAST? [,@<channel>)]
240
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO, D/A, and Totalizer 10
L4452A Example Program Segments
The following sections contain example program segments of commonly
used instrument functions.
The slot and channel addressing scheme used in these examples follow
the form 1ccc where ccc is the channel number. For information on
For detailed example programs involving multiple drivers and
development environments, refer to the the L4400 Product Reference
CD- ROM (p/n 34989- 13601).
Digital Input/Output
Example: Configuring a DIO channel The following program segment
configures channel 1 on the DAC as an output and then reads the output
value (the channel is not reconfigured as an input). Then, the channel is
reconfigured as an input and the value is read again.
The second command below returns 64 as it is physically reading the
output data.
SOURce:DIGital:DATA:BYTE 64,(@1001)
SENSe:DIGital:DATA:BIT? 0,(@1001)
The second command below returns whatever is being input externally.
CONFigure:DIGital:STATe INPut,(@1001)
SENSe:DIGital:DATA:BIT? 0,(@1001)
Totalizer
Example: Reading totalizer channel count The following command reads the
count on totalizer channel 5.
SENSe:TOTalize:DATA? (@1005)
Example: Configuring the totalizer reset mode To configure the totalizer reset
mode, send either of the following commands.
The following command configures totalizer channel 5 to be read without
resetting its count.
SENSe:TOTalize:TYPE READ,(@1005)
The following command configures totalizer channel 5 to be reset to "0"
after it is read (RRESet means “read and reset”).
CONFigure:TOTalize RRES,(@1005)
L4400 User’s Guide
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO, D/A, and Totalizer
Example: Configuring the totalizer for count This command configures the
totalizer to count on the rising edge or falling edge of the input signal.
The following command configures the totalizer (channel 5) to count on
the negative edge (falling) of the input signal.
TOTalize:SLOPe NEGative,(@1005)
Example: Clearing count on the totalizer channel This command immediately
clears the count on the specified totalizer channel (channel 5).
TOTalize:CLEAR:IMMediate (@1005)
DAC Output
Example: Setting output voltage This command sets the output voltage level
for the specified DAC channels. The following command outputs +2.5 V
DC on DAC channels 6 and 7.
SOURce:VOLTage 2.5,(@1006,1007)
Querying and Resetting the L4452A
Example: Querying the instrument identify The following command returns
the identify of the multifunction module.
SYSTem:CTYPe? 1
Example: Resetting the instrument to its power-on state The following
command resets the multifunction module to its power- on state.
SYSTem:CPON 1
242
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO, D/A, and Totalizer 10
L4452A Simplified Block Diagram
User-Supplied Connections
Bit 0
8
8
Channel
001
Bit 7
Bit 8
Channel
002
Bit 15
Bit 16
DIO
8
Channel
003
Bit 23
Bit 24
8
Channel
004
Bit 31
Count +
32 Bits
Count -
Channel
005
Totalizer
Gate
Gate
16 Bits
DAC 1H
D/A1
Channel
006
DAC 1L
16 Bits
DAC 2H
DAC 2L
Channel
007
D/A2
L4400 User’s Guide
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO, D/A, and Totalizer
L4452A D-Sub Connector
BIT
0
4
BIT
1
5
BIT
2
7
BIT
3
8
BIT
4
9
BIT
5
10
BIT
6
11
BIT
7
12
BIT
8
14
BIT
9
15
BIT
10
16
BIT
11
17
CNT - CNT + GND
GND
6
GND
13
50-Pin D-Sub
1
2
3
Female Connector
BIT
12
BIT
13
BIT
14
BIT
15
BIT
16
BIT
17
BIT
18
BIT
19
BIT
20
BIT
21
BIT
22
GND GATE GATE
18 19 20
GND
24
GND
30
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
DAC
2L
DAC DAC
DAC
1H
BIT
23
BIT
24
BIT
25
BIT
26
BIT
27
BIT
28
BIT
29
BIT
30
BIT
31
GND
35
NC
36
GND
41
GND
47
2H
1L
34
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
Description
Bit 0
Socket
4
Description
Bit 16
Socket
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
40
42
43
44
45
46
48
49
50
Description
Count -
Socket
Description
GND
No Connect
Socket
47
1
36
Bit 1
5
Bit 17
Bit 18
Bit 19
Bit 20
Bit 21
Bit 22
Bit 23
Bit 24
Bit 25
Bit 26
Bit 27
Bit 28
Bit 29
Bit 30
Bit 31
Count +
Gate
2
Channel 5
Totalizer
Bit 2
7
19
Bit 3
8
Not-Gate 20
Channel 1
Channel 3
Bit 4
9
DAC 1L
DAC 1H
DAC 2L
DAC 2H
GND
38
39
34
37
3
Channel 6
Channel 7
Bit 5
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
21
22
23
25
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
GND
6
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
GND
13
18
24
30
35
41
GND
Channel 2
Channel 4
GND
GND
GND
GND
244
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO, D/A, and Totalizer 10
34952T Terminal Block
Each terminal block is labeled with the model number and the
abbreviated module name.
The 34952T provides space for breadboard and for a connector to control
an external Opto-22 standard board.
Breadboard
Breadboard
Space and wiring provided for
user-supplied Opto-22 connector
L4452A Terminal Block.
L4400 User’s Guide
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO, D/A, and Totalizer
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
246
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
Calibration Procedures
This section contains performance verification and adjustment
(calibration) procedures for the L4400 Series L4451A 4- Channel Isolated
D/A Converter and L4452A Multifunction Module.
Closed-Case Electronic Calibration These instruments feature closed- case
electronic calibration. No internal mechanical adjustments are required.
The instruments calculate correction factors based upon the readings
from a separate DMM sent to the instruments during the calibration
procedure. The new correction factors are stored in non- volatile memory
until the next calibration adjustment is performed. Non- volatile EEPROM
calibration memory does not change when power has been off or after a
remote interface reset.
Agilent Technologies Calibration Services
When your instruments are due for calibration, contact your local Agilent
Service Center for low-cost recalibration. The L4451A and L4452A are
supported on automated calibration systems which allow Agilent to
provide this service at competitive prices.
Calibration Interval
The instruments should be calibrated on a regular interval determined by
the accuracy requirements of your application.
A 1- year interval is adequate for most applications. Accuracy
specifications are warranted only if adjustment is made at regular
calibration intervals. Accuracy specifications are not warranted beyond
the 1- year calibration interval. Agilent does not recommend extending
calibration intervals beyond 2 years for any application.
Adjustment is Recommended
Specifications are only guaranteed within the period stated from the last
adjustment. Whatever calibration interval you select, Agilent recommends
that complete re- adjustment should always be performed at the
calibration interval. This will assure that the L4451A and L4452A will
remain within specification for the next calibration interval. This criteria
for re- adjustment provides the best long-term stability.
Performance data measured during Performance Verification Tests does
not guarantee the instruments will remain within these limits unless the
adjustments are performed.
adjustments have been performed.
248
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
A
Time Required for Calibration
The L4451A and L4452A can be automatically calibrated under computer
control. With computer control you can perform the complete calibration
procedures and performance verification tests in less than 30 minutes
once the instruments are warmed-up (see “L4451A and L4452A
Performance Test Considerations”).
Automating Calibration Procedures
You can automate the complete verification and adjustment procedures
outlined in this chapter. You can program the instrument configurations
specified for each test and then enter readback verification data into a
test program and compare the results to the appropriate test limit
values.
The instruments must be unsecured prior to initiating the calibration
procedures (see “Calibration Security”).
Recommended Test Equipment
The test equipment recommended for the performance verification and
adjustment procedures is listed in Table A-1. If the exact instrument is
not available, substitute calibration standards of equivalent accuracy.
Table A-1. Recommended Test Equipment
Application
Recommended Equipment
Accuracy Requirements
Analog Output L4451A
Agilent 34401A, 34410A, or
34411A
<1/5 L4451A 24-hour voltage /
current specification
Analog Output L4452A
Agilent 34401A, 34410A, or
34411A
<1/5 L4452A 24-hour voltage /
current specification
L4400 User’s Guide
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
Calibration Security
This feature allows you to enter a security code to prevent accidental or
unauthorized adjustments of the instruments. When you first receive your
instrument, it is secured. Before you can adjust the instrument, you must
unsecure it by entering the correct security code.
If you forget your security code, you can disable the security feature by
following the procedure below.
NOTE
• Calibration is secured and unsecured using the command:
CALibration:SECure:STATe <mode>,<code>
• The security code is set to ATL4400 when the instrument is shipped
from the factory. The security code is stored in non- volatile memory,
and does not change when power has been off, after a Factory Reset
(*RST command), or after an Instrument Preset (SYSTem:PRESet
command).
• The security code may contain up to 12 alphanumeric characters. The
first character must be a letter, but the remaining characters can be
letters, numbers, or an underscore ( _ ). You do not have to use all 12
characters but the first character must always be a letter.
• The L4451A 4- Channel DAC has two modes of adjustment, based upon
the setting of the calibration security feature. Additional details are
Refer to the Programmer's Reference Help File located on the Agilent
L4400 Product Reference CD- ROM for complete information on the
L4451A and L4452A calibration command.
To Unsecure the Instrument Without the Security Code To unsecure the
instrument and reset the security code when the current security code is
unknown, follow the steps below.
1 Turn off power to the instrument.
2 Remove the instrument sub- assembly from the instrument carrier.
3 Turn on the instrument (carrier).
4 Send the command CALibration:SECure:STATe OFF,<code> to
the instrument. Enter ANY valid (see above) code. This code is
temporarily used to unsecure the instrument.
5 Send the command CALibration:SECure:CODE <new_code> and
enter the instrument’s new security code. Record this code for future
reference.
250
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
A
6 Send the command CALibration:SECure:STATe ON to activate the new
code and secure the instrument.
7 Turn off the instrument and re- install the instrument sub-assembly
into the instrument carrier. Turn on the instrument.
Continue with the procedures for calibrating the instrument. Note that
the instrument will first have to be unsecured using the new security
code set in Step 5.
Calibration Message
The instruments allow you to store a message in calibration memory. For
example, you can store such information as the date when the last
calibration was performed, the date when the next calibration is due, the
instrument’s serial number, or even the name and phone number of the
person to contact for a new calibration.
• You can record a calibration message only when the instrument is
unsecured. You can read the calibration message whether the
instrument is secured or unsecured.
• The calibration message may contain up to 40 characters.
• Calibration Message Commands:
CALibration:STRing “<string>”
CALibration:STRing?
Calibration Count
You can query the L4451A and L4452A to determine how many
calibrations have been performed. Note that your instrument was
calibrated before it left the factory. When you receive your instrument,
be sure to read the count to determine its initial value.
32
• The calibration count increments up to a maximum of 2 - 1 after
which it rolls over to “0”. Since the value increments by one for each
calibration point, a complete calibration may increase the value by
many counts.
• Calibration Count Command:
CALibration:COUNt?
L4400 User’s Guide
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
Calibration Process
The following general procedure is the recommended method to complete
a full instrument calibration.
1 See “L4451A and L4452A Performance Test Considerations.”
2 Perform the verification tests to characterize the instrument (incoming
data).
page 250).
4 Perform the DAC adjustment procedures on either the L4451A or
L4452A.
5 Secure the instrument against unauthorized calibration.
6 Note the security code and calibration count in the instrument’s
maintenance records.
Aborting a Calibration in Progress
Sometimes it may be necessary to abort a calibration after the procedure
has been initiated. You can abort a calibration at any time by turning off
the power. You can also abort the calibration by sending the device clear
message or the CALibration:ABORt command.
If you abort a calibration in progress by cycling power when the instrument
CAUTION
is attempting to write new calibration constants to EEPROM, you may lose
all calibration constants for the function. Typically, upon re-applying power,
the instrument will report error 705 Cal:Aborted. You may also generate
errors 740 through 746. If this occurs, you should not use the instrument
until a complete re-adjustment has been performed.
252
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
A
Performance Verification Tests
Use the Performance verification tests to verify the performance of the
instruments. The performance verification tests use the instrument’s
specifications contained in the L4451A and L4452A Product Data Sheets.
L4451A and L4452A Performance Test Considerations
For optimum performance, all test procedures should comply with the
following recommendations:
• Assure that the calibration ambient temperature is stable and between
18 °C and 28 °C. Ideally the calibration should be performed at 23 °C
1 °C.
• Assure ambient relative humidity is less than 80%.
• Install the plug- in module and allow a 1 hour warm- up period before
verification or adjustment.
• Use shielded twisted pair Teflon® insulated cables to reduce settling
and noise errors. Keep the input cables as short as possible.
• Remove all user wiring and connections from the instruments before
verification or adjustment.
L4451A 4-Channel Isolated DAC Module
Each isolated DAC output channel can be measured and adjusted using a
DMM with voltage and current measurement capability.
There are two ways to adjust the DACs, depending upon the state of
calibration security:
• If the instrument is secured for calibration when the adjustment is
begun, the adjustments are considered volatile. All adjustments are
discarded when power is cycled. This provides an easy means to make
immediate temperature- compensated adjustments to the DAC outputs
without overwriting stored calibration constants.
When this type of adjustment is made, the calibration count (see
page 251) is not advanced.
• If the instrument is unsecured for calibration, the adjustments are
written to non- volatile calibration memory. The calibration count (see
page 251) is advanced.
L4400 User’s Guide
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
L4451A Verification
The test connections for verifying the L4451A DAC output current and
voltage using an external DMM are shown in Figures A- 1 and A- 2.
Note that connections are shown for a single channel.
L4451A Terminal Block
DMM
twist wires
HI
HI
LO
LO
I
Output current verification
Figure A-1. L4451A Output Current Connections.
254
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
A
L4451A Terminal Block
DMM
twist wires
HI
HI
LO
LO
I
Output Voltage verification
Figure A-2. L4451A Output Voltage Connections.
Analog Output Verification Test
This procedure is used to check the calibration of the current and
voltage outputs on the L4451A 4- channel DAC. Verification checks are
performed only for those output values with unique calibration constants.
Current Output Verification
1 With the DMM disconnected from the L4451A, set the DMM to the
100mA range or the lowest range that can measure 20 mA (do not use
autorange).
2 The DMM reading is the current offset for the selected range. If the
DMM has “null” capability, turn it on at this time. Otherwise, record
the offset which will be subtracted from the subsequent current
measurements.
3 Connect channel 1 of the L4451A as shown in Figure A- 1. Configure
the L4451A to output the currents listed in Table A- 2. For each
current level measured, subtract the current offset recorded in Step 2
as applicable. The results should be within the limits listed in Table
A- 2.
4 Repeat Step 3 for L4451A channels 2, 3, and 4.
L4400 User’s Guide
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
Voltage Output Verification
1 With the DMM disconnected from the L4451A, set the DMM to the
100V range or the lowest range that can measure 16V (do not use
autorange).
2 Short the inputs to the DMM. The DMM reading is the offset voltage
for the selected range. If the DMM has “null” capability, turn it on at
this time. Otherwise, record the offset which will be subtracted from
the subsequent voltage measurements.
3 Connect channel 1 of the L4451A as shown in Figure A- 2. Configure
the L4451A to output the voltages listed in Table A- 2. For each
voltage level measured, subtract the offset voltage recorded in Step 2
as applicable. The results should be within the limits listed in Table
A- 2.
4 Repeat Step 3 for L4451A channels 2, 3, and 4.
It is not necessary to test the voltage output at the full rated 10 mA load. If
you test the output using a load, connect the sense terminals.
NOTE
Table A-2. L4451A Output Current and Voltage Levels.
Error From Nominal
(90 day)
Output Current
20 ma
15 mA
10 mA
5 ma
23 µA
18.5 µA
14 µA
9.5 µA
5 µA
[1]
0 mA
-5 mA
-10 ma
-15 mA
-20 mA
9.5 µA
14 µA
18.5 µA
23 µA
[1] Apply a measured “0” offset to this
measurement
256
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
A
Table A-2. L4451A Output Current and Voltage Levels (cont’d).
Error From Nominal
(90 day)
Output Voltage
11 mV
9 mV
8 mV
7 mV
5 mV
3 mV
5 mV
7 mV
8 mV
9 mV
11 mV
16V
12V
10V
8V
4V
0V
-4V
-8V
-10V
-12V
-16V
Analog Output Adjustments
The following analog output adjustment procedures are to be performed
following a 1 hour warm up period.
This procedure results in the L4451A setting a zero adjustment and a
gain adjustment constant for each DAC output. You must perform all the
adjustments on one analog output channel before adjusting the other
analog output channels. The procedure can be aborted at any time using
the command:
CALibration:ABORt (@<channel>)
Each of the four DAC channels is calibrated separately for voltage and
current. A DMM capable of measuring up to 12V and 22 mA is
required. A calibrated 6.5 digit DMM is recommended.
There are 88 calibration points required to calibrate the voltage and
current on all four DAC channels, so automation of the procedure is
highly recommended.
L4400 User’s Guide
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
Voltage Adjustments
1 With the DMM disconnected from the L4451A, set the DMM to the
100V range or the lowest range that can measure 16V (do not use
autorange).
2 Short the inputs to the DMM. The DMM reading is the offset voltage
for the selected range. If the DMM has “null” capability, turn it on at
this time. Otherwise, record the offset which will be subtracted from
the subsequent voltage measurements.
3 Unsecure the instrument for calibration using the command:
CALibration:SECure:STATe 0, <code>
4 Connect channel 1 of the L4451A to the DMM as shown in Figure A- 2.
Set the DMM to measure DC volts.
5 Refering to Table A-3, set the first DAC calibration point using the
command:
CALibration:BEGin:VOLTage 1, (@<channel>)
For channel 1, the command is executed as:
CALibration:BEGin:VOLTage 1, (@1001)
6 Measure the DAC output on the DMM. Subtract the offset voltage
measured in Step 2 from the reading. Write this value to the DAC
using the command:
CALibration:POINt? <value>
Note the DAC output which is now calibration point 2 (Table A- 3).
Subtract the offset voltage from the new DMM reading and write the
value to the DAC as above.
7 Repeat Step 6 until the nine voltage calibration points have been
entered and measured. ”0” is returned after the last calibration point
(point 9) indicating the end of the sequence.
8 Separately connect L4451A channels 2, 3, and 4 to the DMM as shown
in Figure A- 2. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for each channel until
calibration points 1 through 9 have been measured and entered.
258
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
A
Table A-3. L4451A DAC Voltage Calibration Points.
Minimum
Expected Value
Maximum
Expected Value
Result
Calibration Point
-0.5V
-10.0V
-10.5V
-11.0V
-11.5V
8.0V
0.5V
-8.0V
-8.5V
-9.0V
-9.5V
10.0V
10.5V
11.0V
11.5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
8.5 V
9.0V
7
8
9.5V
9*
* Voltage calibration constants for the channel are saved in non-volatile
memory after completion of this step.
Current Adjustments
1 With the DMM disconnected from the L4451A, set the DMM to the
100mA range or the lowest range that can measure 20 mA (do not use
autorange).
2 The DMM reading is the current offset for the selected range. If the
DMM has “null” capability, turn it on at this time. Otherwise, record
the offset which will be subtracted from the subsequent current
measurements.
3 Unsecure the instrument for calibration using the command:
CALibration:SECure:STATe 0, <code>
4 Connect channel 1 of the L4451A to the DMM as shown in Figure A- 1.
Set the DMM to measure DC current.
5 Refering to Table A- 4, set the first DAC calibration point on channel 1
using the command:
CALibration:BEGin:CURRent 1, (@<channel>)
For channel 1, the command is executed as:
L4400 User’s Guide
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
CALibration:BEGin:CURRent 1, (@1001)
6 Measure the DAC output on the DMM. Subtract the current offset
measured in Step 2 from the reading. Write this value to the DAC
using the command:
CALibration:POINt? <value>
(measured current in Amps)
Note the DAC output which is now calibration point 2 (Table A- 3).
Subtract the offset voltage from the new DMM reading and write the
value to the DAC as above.
7 Repeat Step 6 until the 13 curent calibration points have been entered
and measured. ”0” is returned after the last calibration point (point
13) indicating the end of the sequence.
8 Separately connect L4451A channels 2, 3, and 4 to the DMM as shown
in Figure A- 1. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for each channel until
calibration points 1 through 13 have been measured and entered.
Table A-4. L4451A DAC Current Calibration Points.
Minimum
Expected Value
Maximum
Expected Value
Result
Calibration Point
-2.0 mA
-10.0 mA
-10.9 mA
-11.5 mA
8.0 mA
2.0 mA
-8.0 mA
-8.0 mA
-9.5 mA
10.9 mA
11.0 mA
11.5 mA
-16.0 mA
-16.0 mA
-16.0 mA
22.0 mA
22.0 mA
22.0 mA
1
2
3
4
5
9.0 mA
6
9.5 mA
7
-22.0 mA
-22.0 mA
-22.0 mA
16.0 mA
16.0 mA
16.0 mA
8
9
10
11
12
13*
* Current calibration constants for the channel are saved in non-volatile
memory after completion of this step.
260
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
A
L4452A Multifunction Module
Verification and calibration of the L4452A Multifunction Module is
limited to channels 6 and 7 which are the DAC (voltage) output channels.
L4452A Verification
The test connection for verifying the DAC output voltage on channels 6
and 7 of the L4452A are shown in Figure A- 3.
L4452A Terminal Block
DMM
twist wires
HI
HI
LO
LO
I
Figure A-3. L4452A DAC Output Connections (Channels 6 and 7).
DAC Output Verification Test
This procedure is used to check the calibration of the DAC outputs on
channels 6 and 7 of the L4452A. Verification checks are performed only
for those output values with unique calibration constants.
1 With the DMM disconnected from the L4452A, set the DMM to the
100V range or the lowest range that can measure 16V (do not use
autorange).
2 Short the inputs to the DMM. The DMM reading is the offset voltage
for the selected range. If the DMM has “null” capability, turn it on at
L4400 User’s Guide
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
this time. Otherwise, record the offset which will be subtracted from
the subsequent voltage measurements.
3 Connect channel 6 of the L4452A as shown in Figure A- 3. Configure
the L4452A to output the voltages listed in Table A- 5. For each
voltage level measured, subtract the offset voltage recorded in Step 2
as applicable. The results should be within the limits listed in Table
A- 5.
4 Repeat Step 3 for channel 7.
It is not necessary to test the voltage output at the full rated 10 mA load.
NOTE
Table A-5. L4452A Output Voltage Levels (Channels 6 and 7).
Error From Nominal
(1 Year)
Output Voltage
45 mV
20 mV
45 mV
10V
0V
-10V
DAC Output Adjustment
The following analog output adjustment procedure is to be performed
following a 1 hour warm up period.
This procedure sets a zero adjustment and a gain adjustment constant for
each L4452A DAC output channel (6 and 7). You must complete all the
adjustments on one channel before adjusting the other channel.
Voltage Adjustments
1 With the DMM disconnected from the L4452A, set the DMM to the
100V range or the lowest range that can measure 16V (do not use
autorange).
2 Short the inputs to the DMM. The DMM reading is the offset voltage
for the selected range. If the DMM has “null” capability, turn it on at
this time. Otherwise, record the offset which will be subtracted from
the subsequent voltage measurements.
3 Unsecure the instrument for calibration using the command:
CALibration:SECure:STATe 0, <code>
262
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
A
4 Connect channel 6 of the L4452A to the DMM as shown in Figure A-3.
Set the DMM to measure DC volts.
5 Set the first DAC calibration point using the command:
CALibration:BEGin:VOLTage 1, (@<channel>)
For channel 6, the command is executed as:
CALibration:BEGin:VOLTage 1, (@1006)
6 Measure the DAC output on the DMM. Subtract the offset voltage
measured in Step 2 from the reading. Write the result to the DAC using the
command:
CALibration:POINt? <value>
Note the DAC output which is now calibration point 2. Subtract the offset
voltage from the new DMM reading and write the value to the DAC using:
CALibration:POINt? <value>
7 Connect channel 7 of the L4452A to the DMM as shown in Figure A-3.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for channel 7.
L4400 User’s Guide
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
264
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
command parameters
Numerics
34921T
34945EXT
command summary
B
buffered input
buffered output
34951T
34952T
byte ordering
configuration
C
calibration
connector
connector pinouts
counter operations
calibration interval
calibration procedure
A
address string
addresses
addressing
calibration procedures
calibration time
channel drive voltage
channel numbering
channel numbering and width
channel numbers
channel polarity
Agilent Connection Expert
D
DAC output adjustment
DAC output verification test
default and reset states
default settings
delay
deleting traces from memory
digital I/O
Digital I/O operations
analog bus port
analog output
channel threshold
channel width
clock output
analog output adjustments
analog output verification test
L4400 User’s Guide
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
distribution board
F
I
distribution boards
initiated measurement mode
format
Instrument overviews
instrument overviews
instruments
interrupt lines
drivers
D-sub pinouts
frequency measurements
G
GPIB
GPIB cables
E
examples
execution times
H
handshake line drive mode
handshake line output voltage level
handshake line polarity
handshake line threshold
handshaking
handshaking digital data
hardware descriptions
K
L
L4400
L4421A
L4433A
external pullups
266
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
L4433A simplified schematic (one-wire
L4451A
LAN settings
LED position indicators
limits
L4433A simplified schematic (two-wire
L4437A
M
measurement functions
L4445A
memory
memory operations
monitor mode
N
network connections
non-sequential scanning
L4452A
O
overload fuse
L4450A
P
paths (sequences)
pattern matching
LAN network
performance test verification
performance verification
pinouts
L4400 User’s Guide
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
simplified block diagrams
simplified schematics
snubber circuitry
S
position indicators
power cord
power-fail jumper
switch position indicators
switch verification
synchronous handshake mode
scanning on alarm
SCPI command summary
T
terminal block
Q
SCPI programming
security code
sense terminals
sequences
settling time
R
reading digital data
recommended test equipment
totalizer input
totalizer mode
recovery time
remote sensing
268
L4400 User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
U
W
writing digital data
V
verification
Y
VISA
Y1150A distribution board
VISA COM
Y1151A distribution board
Y1152A distribution board
Y1153A distribution board
Y1154A distribution board
Y1155A distribution board
L4400 User’s Guide
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|